JP2020073197A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance amusement of games during a prescribed period which becomes a transition trigger to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player.SOLUTION: A Pachinko slot machine 1 includes a CZ being a game state as a chance zone for an ART transition, and in the CZ, if 30 games are completed, a transition to the ART becomes definite. Further, during the CZ, when a pressing order bell is won in a lottery, an ART transition lottery is also performed, which can be won at a prescribed probability, and if this ART transition lottery is kept, the CZ is finished in the middle. At this time, in the Pachinko slot machine 1, if the pressing order bell is given a correct answer, the ART transition lottery is made invalid to continue the CZ, but if the pressing order bell is given an incorrect answer, the ART transition lottery is kept to finish the CZ.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 75

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachi-slot machine.

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which information that is advantageous to the player is notified with a high probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination It is also common to realize an advantageous state (ART) that is advantageous to the player by performing the operation in (1).

  By the way, in a gaming machine having an ART function, a chance zone having a high degree of expectation of transition to the ART state is provided, and if a specific condition is satisfied in this chance zone, control is performed so as to transition to the ART state with high probability. .. For example, in Patent Document 1, when a specific symbol combination (RT operation symbol 1) is aimed in the chance zone (CZ) and a specific symbol combination is displayed, replay has a high probability that the internal winning combination is high. There is disclosed a gaming machine that performs control to shift to.

JP, 2013-048945, A

  In such a gaming machine of Patent Document 1, the player's interest in the chance zone is concentrated on whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed. By the way, whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed depends on the result of the internal lottery. Therefore, depending on the player, an opportunity in which the specific symbol combination may be displayed in the chance zone. May never be obtained, or the chances of such possibility may be extremely small. In such a case, the player may not get any chance, despite the fact that the player has moved to the chance zone, and the interest in the game may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period which is a trigger for shifting to an advantageous state advantageous to a player. The purpose is to

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state, as a state in which a game is played. Then, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And, based on the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the main control circuit 41, the start switch 16S), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, by rotating the reel, the symbol Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern change means (for example, the main control circuit 41, the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R) for changing the , The first symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination displayed at the time of the correct answer in the pushing order) or the second symbol combination (for example, the bell spill) depending on the order of the stop operation when it is determined as the internal winning combination. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 41) that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations including a push-displaying combination that can be stopped and displayed (for example, a pressing-order bell), and the plurality of combinations. Stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 41, stop switch 17S) provided corresponding to the reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. Based on the combination and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means, the rotation of the reel is stopped to stop the fluctuation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. A combination of reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 41) to be made, and the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means. Based on a winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 41) that determines whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means is based on a predetermined condition, the state shifts to the advantageous state. Whether or not to carry out, a lottery state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) for starting an advantageous state lottery state (for example, CZ) for carrying out the transition lottery, and the above-mentioned push by the internal winning combination determination means in the advantageous state lottery state. When the winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the first transition lottery that determines to shift to the advantageous state with a predetermined probability (for example, transition lottery to ART performed in the middle of CZ) In the advantageous state lottery state, when a predetermined number of unit games (for example, 30 games) have passed, a second transition lottery for determining with a specific probability of shifting to the advantageous state (for example, to ART performed at the time of CZ completion) Transition lottery) advantageous state lottery means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) that performs the transition lottery, and the first symbol combination is displayed on the activated line in the unit game where the first transition lottery is performed, the advantageous state Regardless of the transition lottery result to, the first transition lottery is invalidated, when the second symbol combination is displayed on the activated line in the unit game, the lottery for maintaining the lottery result of the first transition lottery. With the result management means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42), the first transition lottery is performed in the advantageous state lottery state, and the lottery result management means performs the first transition lottery. When the result of lottery is maintained, or when the predetermined number of unit games have passed, the lottery state ending means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) that ends the advantageous state lottery state, and the first transition lottery or the first lottery. When it is decided to shift to the advantageous state by the 2 shift lottery, the advantageous state shift means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) that shifts the state of playing the game to the advantageous state, and the advantageous state shift means When the second transition lottery determines to shift to the advantageous state, the first transition lottery determines to shift to the advantageous state, which is advantageous state (for example, more advantageous state). It is characterized by shifting to a different ART state ART game state).

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, in the advantageous state lottery state (chance zone) in which the lottery is shifted to the advantageous state advantageous to the player, the first winning combination is determined as the push winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Transfer lottery. Then, the advantageous state lottery state is finished when the first transition lottery is carried out and the lottery result of the first transition lottery is maintained, or when a predetermined number of unit games have passed. In the gaming machine that performs the lottery transition to the advantageous state based on the internal winning combination as described above, some players may not be able to receive the first transition lottery during the advantageous state lottery state at all. In the gaming machine, the second transfer lottery is carried out when a predetermined number of unit games have passed in the advantageous state lottery state. As a result, even if the push winning combination is not determined as the internal winning combination in the advantageous state lottery state, it is possible to receive the transition lottery to the advantageous state without fail, so that the interest in the advantageous state lottery state can be improved. ..

  Further, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the first lottery is performed when the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, but when the first symbol combination is displayed as a result of the stop operation, the first transfer lottery is performed. When the second symbol combination is displayed, the result of the first transfer lottery is maintained. According to such control, the player will be interested in the symbol combination displayed in the game in which the push winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, so that the interest in each game in the advantageous state lottery state Can be improved. In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the advantageous state of transitioning through the second transition lottery is an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the advantageous state of transitioning through the first transition lottery, so the player has the second symbol. A combination is displayed (the first transition lottery is maintained and the advantageous state lottery state is not ended), and it is desired that a predetermined number of unit games be passed, and the interest in the advantageous state lottery state can be maintained to the end. it can.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention further includes invalidation number determining means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) for determining an invalidation number (for example, invalid point) that invalidates the first transition random determination in the advantageous state random determination state. It is characterized in that the lottery result management means invalidates the first transfer lottery only for the invalid number of times, regardless of the symbol combination displayed on the activated line.

  As a result, as long as the number of invalidations remains, the result of the first transition lottery is invalid, and thus it is possible to prevent the advantageous state lottery state from ending. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of receiving the second transition lottery more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest in the advantageous state lottery state.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a higher probability that the probability of deciding to shift to the advantageous state in the first transition lottery is higher than that of itself based on the number of unit games that have passed in the advantageous state lottery state. A first mode (for example, CZ mode 0) that shifts to (for example, CZ mode 1) and a second mode that does not shift to a first mode in which the probability is higher than the first mode and the probability is lower than itself. And a mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the first mode shifts to the second mode during the advantageous state lottery state, the second mode does not shift from the second mode to the first mode. Therefore, the advantageous state lottery state has elapsed. As the number of unit games increases, the probability of winning the first transfer lottery increases. For the player, since it is desirable that the advantageous state lottery state continues for a long time, the push order combination has a strong interest in the symbol combination displayed in the game determined as the internal winning combination, and the advantageous state lottery state. The interest in the inside can be improved.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the lottery state start means starts the advantageous state lottery state, determines the number of times of transition of the unit game to transition from the first mode to the second mode. Means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42 for determining CZ_MAP), and production means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42, the liquid crystal display device 10) that produces an effect in the second mode that is different from the first mode. It is characterized by further comprising.

  According to such a gaming machine, the player can grasp or infer that the mode has changed from the first mode to the second mode from the rendering mode of the rendering means. Since the second mode is a mode in which there is a high probability of deciding to shift to the advantageous state, the player can play the game with a sense of expectation to shift to the advantageous state in the subsequent game, which is advantageous. The interest in the state lottery state can be improved.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of a game during a predetermined period, which serves as an opportunity to shift to an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

It is a figure which shows the function flow of the pachi-slot which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is the whole perspective view showing the external structure of the above-mentioned pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the said pachi-slot. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the said pachi-slot. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the sub-control circuit of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state controlled by the main control circuit of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the transition conditions of the game state controlled by the main control circuit of the said pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure for explaining the outline of the internal winning combination in the pachi-slot. It is a figure for explaining the outline of the internal winning combination in the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing an internal winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM of the pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the internal carryover combination storing area provided in the main RAM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the display combination storage area provided in the main RAM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the game state flag storage area provided in the main RAM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the operation stop button storage area provided in the main RAM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the press order storage area provided in the main RAM of the said pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol code storage area provided in the main RAM of the pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state controlled by the sub-control circuit of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows a part of correspondence relationship between the classification of the winning combination managed by the main control circuit of the pachi-slot, and the abbreviation of the winning combination managed by the sub control circuit. It is a figure which shows the display screen of the liquid crystal display device of the said pachi-slot. It is a schematic diagram of the transfer lottery during the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a start ART lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a start ART lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a start ART lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the mode transfer lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the mode transfer lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the mode transfer lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the mode transfer lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the mode transfer lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the apocalypse actuation random determination table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the apocalypse MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the apocalypse MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a MAP data correspondence table showing MAP data defined in the apocalypse MAP. It is a diagram showing an apocalypse act time production ball lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table at the time of a reel stop memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a schematic diagram showing a flow of a game during the high probability game state of the pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the avoidance point random determination table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game during the CZ of the pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the CZ_MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a CZ_MAP correspondence table which shows the CZ mode defined by CZ_MAP. It is a figure which shows the invalid point lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the CZ during production ball lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows a part of correspondence relationship between the classification of the winning combination managed by the main control circuit of the pachi-slot, and the abbreviation of the winning combination managed by the sub control circuit. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game in the BB of the pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table at the time of BB start memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the BB middle mode up lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the BB middle mode up lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table at the time of the end of BB stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a schematic diagram showing a flow of a game during ART of the pachi-slot. It is a schematic diagram showing a flow of a game during ART of the pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the ART state random determination table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a boss MAP lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a boss MAP data correspondence table showing the boss MAP data defined in the boss MAP. It is a figure which shows the production ball lottery table in the enemy determination ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the production ball lottery table in the enemy determination ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the production ball upgrade lottery table in the enemy determination ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the enemies determination ART intermediate team power addition lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the boss power lottery table in the enemy determination ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a boss status correspondence table showing the status of the opponent in the battle ART. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a battle MAP data correspondence table showing the battle MAP data defined in the battle MAP. It is a figure which shows the production ball lottery table during a battle ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the damage lottery table during a battle ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the damage lottery table during a battle ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the ART state random determination table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the ART state random determination table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a flow chart which shows the main control processing of the above-mentioned pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the internal lottery process of the said pachi-slot. It is a flow chart which shows the above-mentioned pachi-slot bonus end check processing. It is a flow chart which shows the above-mentioned pachi-slot bonus operation check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check process of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption process of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on process of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp control task of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the sound control task of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the mother task of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the main task of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the main board communication task of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the animation task of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is the flowchart which shows the production contents decision processing of the sub CPU of the aforementioned pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start command reception of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flow chart which shows CZ * ART lottery processing at the time of a normal start of the sub CPU of the pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the apocalypse actuation process of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flow chart which shows the high probability game state shift processing of the sub CPU of the pachi-slot. It is a flow chart which shows high probability middle production registration processing of the sub CPU of the above-mentioned pachi-slot. It is a flow chart which shows ART lottery processing at the time of CZ start of the sub CPU of the pachi-slot. It is a flow chart which shows ART lottery processing during BB of a sub CPU of the above-mentioned pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the process during ART of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the enemy determination ART of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the battle ART of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of receipt of a winning operation command of the sub CPU of the pachi-slot. It is a flow chart which shows CZ / ART lottery processing at the time of normal end of the sub CPU of the pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the high probability shift determination process of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the high probability completion determination process of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result management process during CZ of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of receiving a bonus end command of the sub CPU of the pachi-slot.

  Hereinafter, a pachi-slot showing an embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, during the assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”), which is a function for navigating the establishment of a specific small winning combination by a lamp or the like, and the replay probability is higher than the normal time during the specific number of plays. A pachi-slot having a function of assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) in which RT and RT simultaneously operate will be described.

[Pachislot functional flow]
As shown in FIG. 1, in the pachi-slot 1, when a player inserts a medal and the start lever 16 is operated, one value (from 0 to 65535) of a random number in a predetermined numerical range (for example, Hereinafter, a random number value) is extracted.

  The internal winning combination determination means (main CPU 51, which will be described later) performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determination means has a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations based on the detection of the start operation of the unit game on the start lever 16 by the start switch 16S (see FIG. 4) (establishment of a predetermined start condition). Determine the internal winning combination.

  By the determination of the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that is allowed to be displayed along the pay line described later is determined. In addition, as a type of the combination of symbols, there are provided a privilege that is given to the player such as payout of medals, operation of replay (replay), operation of bonus, etc. Has been.

  Subsequently, when the player presses the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R after the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotated, the reel stop control means (main CPU 51 described later) causes an internal winning combination. Based on the timing when the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R is pressed, the control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel 3L, 3C, 3R is performed.

  Here, in the pachi-slot 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, and 3R within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R within the specified time is referred to as "the number of sliding pieces", and the maximum number is four symbols (the maximum number of sliding pieces). ).

  Reel stop control means, when the internal winning combination allowing the display of the combination of symbols related to winning is determined, by utilizing the above specified time, the combination of the symbols follows the winning line as an effective line. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so that the display is as much as possible.

  On the other hand, for symbol combinations that are not allowed to be displayed by the internal winning combination, the specified time is used to reel in the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so that it will not be displayed along the winning line. Stop rotation of 3L, 3C and 3R.

  In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped, the winning determination means (main CPU 51 described later) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed along the winning line is related to winning. Determine whether or not.

  That is, the winning determination means determines whether or not the winning combination is established based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the winning line, based on the fact that the reel stop control means stops the variation of the symbols.

  When it is determined that the game is related to winning, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. The above-described series of flows is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachi-slot 1.

  In the present embodiment, the reel stop operation (operation of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) that is first performed when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating is the first stop operation, the first stop operation. The stop operation performed after the stop operation is called a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed after the second stop operation is called a third stop operation.

  Further, in the pachi-slot 1, in the above-described series of flows, image display performed by a display device such as the liquid crystal display device 10, light output performed by various lamps (lamp 20 described later), and sounds performed by the speakers 21L and 21R. Output, or a combination of these, various effects are performed.

  When the start lever 16 is operated by the player, apart from the random number value used to determine the internal winning combination described above, other lottery processing and random number values for production (hereinafter, random number values for production) are extracted. To be done.

  When the random number value for effect is extracted, the effect content determination means (sub CPU 81 described later) randomly determines the effect to be executed this time from among the plurality of types of effect content associated with the internal winning combination.

  When the content of the effect is determined, the effect executing means determines whether or not there is a winning when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started and the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. Execution of the production is promoted in conjunction with each trigger such as when the player is given a break.

  As described above, in the pachi-slot 1, the player is provided with an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination, that is, the combination of the symbols to be aimed by executing the effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. The interest of the player can be improved.

[Structure of pachi-slot]
Next, the structure of the pachi-slot in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 3 is a view showing the internal structure of the pachi-slot 1.

<Appearance structure>
As shown in FIG. 2, the pachi-slot 1 includes a cabinet 1a that houses reels, circuit boards, and the like, and a front door 1b that is attached to the cabinet 1a so as to be openable and closable. Inside the cabinet 1a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided, and the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are arranged in a row in the lateral direction (direction orthogonal to the reel rotation direction). Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C and 3R are referred to as the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, respectively.

  Each reel (display row) has a cylindrical reel body and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface (circulating surface) of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are continuously drawn along the circumferential direction of the reel body.

  A liquid crystal display device 10 is provided at the center of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display device 10 includes a display screen including a display window 4 for displaying the symbols drawn on the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  The display window 4 is made of, for example, a transparent member such as an acrylic plate, and is provided at a position overlapping the arrangement area of the three reels when viewed from the front (player side), as shown in FIG. It is provided so as to be located on the front side (player side) of one reel. Therefore, the symbols drawn on the three reels provided behind the display window 4 can be viewed through the display window 4.

  In the present embodiment, the display window 4 displays three symbols, which are continuously arranged, out of a plurality of types of symbols drawn on each reel, when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind the display window 4 is stopped. Configured to be able to. That is, in the frame of the display window 4, upper, middle, and lower areas are provided for each reel, and one symbol can be displayed in each area. Therefore, in this embodiment, the symbols are displayed in the frame of the display window 4 in a 3 × 3 array form. Further, in the present embodiment, a pseudo line formed by combining the upper stage of the reel 3L, the middle stage of the reel 3C, and the lower stage of the reel 3R among the three regions including the upper stage, the middle stage, and the lower stage of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Is defined as a line (winning line) that is a target for determining whether or not a winning.

  A 7-segment display 6 including a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode) is provided below the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 10. The 7-segment display 6 is stored in the pachi-slot 1 in the number of medals inserted in the game this time (hereinafter referred to as the number of inserted coins), the number of medals paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of paid-out coins), Information such as the number of medals (hereinafter, referred to as the number of credits) is displayed digitally.

  Further, the front door 1b is provided with various devices (medal slot 11, MAX bet button 12, 1BET button 14, start lever 16, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) which are objects to be operated by the player.

  The medal insertion slot 11 is provided for receiving medals inserted into the pachi-slot 1 from the outside by the player. The medals received through the medal insertion slot 11 are thrown into one game with a predetermined number (for example, 3) as an upper limit, and the amount exceeding the predetermined number can be stored in the pachi-slot 1 (so-called. Credit function). In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the number of medals that can be inserted in one game is three.

  The MAX bet button 12 and the 1 BET button 14 are provided to determine the number of medals deposited in the pachi-slot 1 for one game. Although not shown in FIG. 2, a settlement button is provided on the front door 1b (disposed on the side of the start lever 16 opposite to the stop button). The settlement button is provided to pull out (discard) the medals stored inside the pachi-slot 1 to the outside.

  The start lever 16 is provided to start rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are referred to as the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R, respectively.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the front door 1b is provided with a medal payout opening 18, a medal tray 19, a lamp 20, speakers 21L, 21R and the like.

  The medal payout opening 18 guides the medals discharged by driving a medal payout device 33, which will be described later, to the outside. The medal tray 19 stores the medals discharged from the medal payout opening 18. The lamp 20 is composed of an LED or the like, and turns on / off the light in a pattern corresponding to the effect contents. Further, the speakers 21L and 21R output sound effects such as sound effects and music corresponding to the effect contents.

<Internal structure>
Next, the internal structure of the pachi-slot 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a state in which the front door 1b is opened, and shows a structure on the back side of the front door 1b and an internal structure of the cabinet 1a.

  A main board 31 that constitutes a main control circuit 41 (see FIG. 4) described later is provided in an upper portion of the cabinet 1a. The main control circuit 41 is a circuit that controls the main operation of the game in the pachi-slot 1 and the flow between the operations, such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel, and determination of presence or absence of winning. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 41 will be described later.

  Three reels (a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R) are provided in a central portion of the cabinet 1a. Although not shown in FIG. 3, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor (one of stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R in FIG. 4) described later via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. ..

  A medal payout device 33 (hereinafter referred to as a hopper 33) having a structure capable of accommodating a large amount of medals and discharging them one by one is provided in a lower portion of the cabinet 1a. Further, a power supply device 34 that supplies necessary power to each device included in the pachi-slot 1 is provided on one side portion (left side in the example shown in FIG. 3) of the hopper 33 in the cabinet 1a.

  On the back side of the front door 1b (the side opposite to the display screen side), a sub-board that forms a sub-control circuit 42 (see FIGS. 4 and 5) to be described later is provided above the area where the display window 4 is arranged. 32 is provided. The sub-control circuit 42 is a circuit that controls execution of effects such as display of images. The specific configuration of the sub control circuit 42 will be described later.

  Further, on the back side of the front door 1b, a selector 35 is provided below the area where the display window 4 is arranged. The selector 35 is a device that selects whether or not the material, shape, and the like of the medal inserted from the outside through the medal insertion port 11 is proper, and guides the medal determined to be proper to the hopper 33. Although not shown in FIG. 3, a medal sensor 35S (see FIG. 4, which will be described later) that detects that a proper medal has passed is provided on the path of the medal in the selector 35.

[Circuit Structure of Pachi-Slot]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5, a configuration of a circuit included in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. 4 is a block configuration diagram of the entire circuit included in the pachi-slot 1, and FIG. 5 is a block configuration diagram showing the internal configuration of the sub control circuit.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the pachi-slot 1 includes a main control circuit 41, a sub control circuit 42, and a peripheral device (actuator) electrically connected to these circuits.

<Main control circuit>
The main control circuit 41 is mainly composed of a microcomputer 50 installed on a circuit board (main board 31). As other components, the main control circuit 41 includes a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, a sampling circuit 57, a display drive circuit 64, and a hopper drive circuit 65, as shown in FIG. , And a payout completion signal circuit 66.

  The microcomputer 50 includes a main CPU 51, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 52, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 53.

  The main ROM 52 stores a control program for various processes executed by the main CPU 51, a data table such as an internal lottery table, and data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 42. The main RAM 53 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, and a sampling circuit 57 are connected to the main CPU 51. The clock pulse generation circuit 54 and the frequency divider 55 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 51 executes the control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 56 also generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). Then, the sampling circuit 57 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  Various switches, sensors and the like are connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50. The main CPU 51 receives input signals from various switches and controls the operations of peripheral devices such as the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R.

  The stop switch 17S (stop operation detection means) detects that the player has pressed each of the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R (stop operation). The start switch 16S (start operation detection means) detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation). The settlement switch 14S detects that the settlement button has been pressed by the player.

  The medal sensor 35S (insertion operation detection means) detects that a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 11 has passed through the selector 35. Further, the bet switch 12S detects that the bet button (MAX bet button 12 or 1BET button 14) has been pressed by the player.

  Further, as the peripheral device whose operation is controlled by the microcomputer 50, there are three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R (symbol changing means), a 7-segment display 6 and a hopper 33. Further, a drive circuit for controlling the operation of each peripheral device is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50.

  The motor drive circuit 62 controls driving of three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively. The reel position detection circuit 63 detects, for each reel, a reel index indicating that the reel has made one rotation, by an optical sensor having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion.

  Each of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R has a configuration in which the momentum thereof is proportional to the number of output pulses, and the rotation axis can be stopped at a designated angle. The driving force of each stepping motor is transmitted to the corresponding reel via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Then, each time a pulse is output to each stepping motor, the corresponding reel rotates at a constant angle.

  The main CPU 51 detects the reel index of each reel and then counts the number of times that a pulse is output to the corresponding stepping motor to determine the rotation angle of each reel (specifically, how many symbols the reel has. Just rotate).

  Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to each stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. Then, every time the pulse counter counts the output of a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) required to rotate one symbol, the value of the symbol counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53 is set to "1. Is added. The symbol counter is provided for each reel. Then, the value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel position detection circuit 63 detects the reel index.

  That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the value of the symbol counter, it is managed how many symbols have been rotated after the reel index is detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of sliding pieces in the game is set to 4 symbols. Therefore, for example, when the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel is pressed during the game, the symbol of the predetermined reel located in the corresponding area on the pay line in the display window 4 and the four points ahead thereof The symbols existing in the range are the symbols that can be stopped in the area.

  The display drive circuit 64 included in the main control circuit 41 controls the operation of the 7-segment display 6. The hopper drive circuit 65 controls the operation of the hopper 33. The payout completion signal circuit 66 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 33S provided in the hopper 33, and checks whether or not the number of medals discharged from the hopper 33 to the outside reaches a predetermined payout number. To do.

<Sub control circuit>
As shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5, the sub control circuit 42 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 41, and performs processing such as effect content determination and execution based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. .. As shown in FIG. 5, the sub control circuit 42 basically includes a sub CPU 81, a sub ROM 82, a sub RAM 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, a driver 86, a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 90, an audio RAM 91, A. A / D (Analog to Digital) converter 92, an amplifier 93, and a decorative member drive circuit 94 are included.

  The sub CPU 81 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the sub ROM 82 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. The sub ROM 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

  Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. In the control program stored in the program storage area, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 41, a random number value for effect is extracted to determine effect contents (effect data), and An effect registration task for performing registration, a drawing control task for controlling display of an image on the liquid crystal display device 10 based on the determined effect contents, a lamp control task for controlling light output by the lamp 20, and a speaker 21L. , 21R includes programs such as a voice control task for controlling sound output.

  In the data storage area, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data forming various effect contents, a storage area for storing animation data related to image creation, sound data regarding BGM and sound effects. And various storage areas such as a storage area for storing lamp data regarding a pattern of turning on / off light.

  The sub RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined effect contents and effect data, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 41, and the like.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control circuit 42 is connected with peripheral devices such as the liquid crystal display device 10, the speakers 21L and 21R, the lamp 20, and the movable decoration member 22, and the operation of these peripheral devices is , Are controlled by the sub control circuit 42.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81, the rendering processor 84, the drawing RAM 85 (including the frame buffer), and the driver 86 create a video according to the animation data specified by the effect contents, and the created video is displayed by the liquid crystal display device 10. Is displayed.

  In addition, the sub CPU 81, the DSP 90, the audio RAM 91, the A / D converter 92, and the amplifier 93 output sounds such as BGM from the speakers 21L and 21R according to the sound data specified by the effect contents. Further, the sub CPU 81 turns on and off the lamp 20 in accordance with the lamp data specified by the effect contents.

  The sub CPU 81 and the decorative member drive circuit 94 drive the movable decorative member 22 in accordance with the accessory drive data specified by the effect contents. The movable decorative member 22 is a member for production, and is usually provided around the liquid crystal display device 10 and is arranged so as to be hidden by a decorative portion (not shown) when not producing. Then, when a specific effect is performed, the movable decorative member 22 is driven by the decorative member drive circuit 94 and exposed to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 10. In the following, the movable decorative member 22 is referred to as the movable accessory 22.

[Main side game state transition flow]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7, a game state controlled by the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) of the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment and its transition flow will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 manages the gaming state based on the presence / absence of a bonus winning / actuation, the type of the internal winning combination relating to the replay, and the winning probability thereof. As shown in FIG. 7, the main control circuit 41 distinguishes the bonus non-winning state, the inter-flag state, and the bonus state based on whether or not the bonus (BB) is won / actuated. Specifically, the bonus non-winning state is a state where the bonus is not won and the bonus is not activated, and the inter-flag state is the bonus winning state and the bonus is not operating, and the bonus state is Indicates that the bonus is operating.

  Further, the main control circuit 41 provides six types of states, RT0 gaming state to RT5 gaming state, in which the types of internal winning combinations related to replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other. It should be noted that the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability of a combination relating to replay being determined as an internal winning combination has a low probability, and the RT3 gaming state and the RT5 gaming state are internal winning combinations relating to the replay. It is a gaming state in which the probability of being determined as is a medium probability. The RT4 gaming state is a gaming state in which there is a high probability that a winning combination related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination, and is the most advantageous gaming state among the bonus non-winning states.

  The main control circuit 41 distinguishes the bonus non-winning state, the inter-flag state and the bonus state, which are distinguished based on whether or not the bonus is won / activated, and the RT0 game, which is distinguished based on the type of the internal winning combination relating to the replay and its winning probability. From the state to the RT5 gaming state, the gaming state on the main side in the pachi-slot 1 is managed. More specifically, the main control circuit 41, as the gaming state in the pachi-slot 1, RT0 gaming state of bonus non-winning state, RT1 gaming state of bonus non-winning state, RT2 gaming state of bonus non-winning state, bonus non-winning state RT3 gaming state, RT4 gaming state of bonus non-winning state, RT5 gaming state of flag state, RT0 gaming state of bonus state, RT2 gaming state of bonus state, RT4 gaming state of bonus state, and RB gaming state of bonus state Manages 10 types of states.

  Whether or not the bonus is won is managed based on the data stored in the internal winning combination storage area (see FIG. 48 described later) provided in the main RAM 53. For example, when the data 1 is stored in the bit 2 of the internal winning combination storing area 4, it means that the bonus is won. Further, the presence or absence of bonus operation and the RT game state are managed based on data stored in a game state flag storage area (see FIG. 51 described later) provided in the main RAM 53. For example, when data 1 is stored in bit 3 and bit 5 of the game state flag storage area, the bonus (BB game state) is operating and the RT4 game state is set.

  RT0 gaming state of bonus non-winning state (bits 2 to 7 of internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 of internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and data of all bits of gaming state flag storing area is 0) Is one of the basic gaming states during the bonus non-winning state. As shown in FIG. 6, from the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, the RT3 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, and the inter-flag state There is a possibility of shifting to the RT5 gaming state.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, in the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, when the combination of the symbols relating to (1) the bell spill or the RT1 transition lip is displayed, the bonus non-winning state The RT1 game state is entered. It should be noted that the bell spill is a combination of symbols that is displayed when the pressing order bell, which will be described later, is determined as an internal winning combination and the answer is incorrect in the pressing order determined for each type of the pressing order bell. In addition, the RT1 transition lip is a combination of symbols displayed when an incorrect answer is given to the pushing order determined for each type of the pushing order lip when the pushing order lip described later is determined as an internal winning combination.

  In addition, in the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, (2) When a combination of symbols relating to the RT4 shift lip is displayed, the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state is shifted. The RT4 transition lip is a combination of symbols displayed when the correct answer is given to the pushing order determined for each type of the pushing order lip when the pushing order lip to be described later is determined as the internal winning combination, or will be described later. This is a combination of symbols displayed when “F_chance rep 2” or “F_skip chance rep 2” is determined as the internal winning combination.

  In addition, in the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, (3) When a combination of symbols related to the RT3 transition lip is displayed, the RT3 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state is entered. The RT3 transition lip is a combination of symbols displayed when “F_slip chance lip 1” or “F_cherry lip”, which will be described later, is determined as an internal winning combination.

  In addition, in the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, (5) when the winning combination related to BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the state shifts to the RT5 gaming state of the inter-flag state. The combination relating to BB is any one of “F_black-black-black”, “F_red-red-red-red”, “F_white-white-white”, “F_red-red-white”, and “F_white-white-red” described later. These winning combinations related to BB are carried over as internal winning combinations until a combination of corresponding symbols is displayed when determined as an internal winning combination (that is, until the operation of BB starts), that is, so-called carryover. It is a role.

  Then, the RT1 game state of the bonus non-winning state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and the data of bit 0 of the gaming state flag storing area is data. 1) is one of the basic game states in the bonus non-winning state. As shown in FIG. 6, from the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state and the RT5 gaming state of the inter-flag state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, in the RT1 game state of the bonus non-winning state, (4) when the fixed number of games (five games in this embodiment) has elapsed, the RT0 game of the bonus non-winning state Transition to the state. Further, in the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, when the winning combination related to (5) BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the state shifts to the RT5 gaming state of the flag state.

  In addition, the RT2 game state of the bonus non-winning state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and the bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and the data of bit 1 of the gaming state flag storing area is 1) is a game state in which there is a possibility of shifting after the operation of the BB is completed. In this embodiment, at the end of the bonus, the RT gaming state in the bonus state is maintained and the bonus non-winning state is entered. Therefore, the RT2 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state is shifted when the bonus state ends in the RT2 gaming state of the bonus state. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, from the RT2 game state of the bonus non-winning state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT1 game state of the bonus non-winning state and the RT5 game state of the inter-flag state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, in the RT2 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, (1) when the combination of symbols relating to the bell spill is displayed, the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state Move to. In addition, in the RT2 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, when the winning combination related to (5) BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the state shifts to the RT5 gaming state between the flags.

  In addition, the RT3 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and the bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and the data of bit 2 of the gaming state flag storing area is 1) is a gaming state in which there is a high probability that a winning combination related to replay will be determined as an internal winning combination, as compared to the RT0 gaming state, which is the basic gaming state of the pachi-slot 1. As shown in FIG. 6, from the RT3 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state and the RT5 gaming state of the inter-flag state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, in the RT3 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, (4) when the fixed number of games (five games in this embodiment) has elapsed, the RT0 game of the bonus non-winning state Transition to the state. In addition, in the RT3 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, when the winning combination related to (5) BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the state shifts to the RT5 gaming state between the flags.

  In addition, the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and the bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and the data of bit 3 of the gaming state flag storing area is 1) is an advantageous state in which a winning combination is most likely to be determined as an internal winning combination and a game can be played without reducing medals. As shown in FIG. 6, from the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state and the RT5 gaming state of the inter-flag state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, in the RT4 game state of the bonus non-winning state, when the combination of the symbols related to (1) the bell spill or the RT1 transition lip is displayed, the bonus non-winning state The RT1 game state is entered. In addition, in the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, when the combination related to (5) BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the state shifts to the RT5 gaming state between the flags.

  In addition, the RT5 gaming state between the flags (the data of any one of bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area 1 is 1 and the bit 4 of the gaming state flag storing area is The data 1) is a so-called BB flag in which a winning combination related to BB is carried over as an internal winning combination, and a game that stays until a combination of symbols according to the BB carried over as an internal winning combination is displayed. It is in a state. As shown in FIG. 6, from the RT5 gaming state between the flags, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT0 gaming state of the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, in the RT5 gaming state between the flags, (6) a combination of symbols according to the BB carried over is displayed, and when the BB operates, RT0 in the bonus state Move to the gaming state.

  RT0 game state of the bonus state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and bit 5 of the gaming state flag storing area is 1), It is a game state in which the player stays first when the BB operates. During the bonus state, the RT0 game state of the bonus state is started and the game state is shifted to another game state. As shown in FIG. 6, from the RT0 gaming state of the bonus state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state and the RT4 gaming state of the bonus state.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, in the RT0 game state of the bonus state, when the operation of (10) BB is completed, the state shifts to the RT0 game state of the bonus non-winning state (before and after the bonus ends, RT game state is maintained). The operation of the BB ends when the number of medals paid out during the bonus state exceeds 59.

  In addition, in the bonus state RT0 gaming state, when the winning combination related to (7) JACIN is determined as an internal winning combination, the bonus state RT4 gaming state is entered. The combination of JACIN is one of “F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, and “F_JACIN3” described later. Here, as shown in FIG. 26, which will be described later, in the RT0 gaming state of the bonus state, since the probability that the winning combination related to JACIN is determined as the internal winning combination is high (about 52%), basically the operation of the BB is performed. Before the end, the winning combination related to JACIN is determined as an internal winning combination, and the bonus-state RT4 gaming state is entered. These winning combinations relating to JACIN are determined as internal winning combinations until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed (that is, until the operation of RB is started), only as an internal winning combination during the bonus state. It is a so-called carryover role that is carried over.

  In addition, the RT4 game state of the bonus state (the data of bits 1 to 3 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 is 0, and the data of bit 3 and bit 5 of the gaming state flag storing area is 1) is a role related to JACIN. It is between the so-called RB flags in the bonus state, which is carried over as an internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 6, from the RT4 gaming state of the bonus state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state and the RB gaming state of the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, in the RT4 gaming state of the bonus state, when the operation of (10) BB ends, the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state shifts (before and after the bonus ends, RT game state is maintained). Further, in the RT4 gaming state of the bonus state, (8) the combination of symbols according to the carried over JACIN is displayed, and when the RB operates, the RB gaming state of the bonus state is entered.

  Also, the RB game state of the bonus state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bits 0 to 3 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and bit 5 and bit 6 of the gaming state flag storing area) The data 1) is a gaming state that shifts when the operation of the RB starts during the bonus state. In addition, as shown in FIG. 22, which will be described later, in the RB game state of the bonus state, there is a high probability that “out” is determined as an internal winning combination (about 65%), which is basically a disadvantageous state. In the pachi-slot 1 of the form, during the bonus state, the combination of symbols according to the carried over JACIN is not displayed and the RT4 game state of the bonus state is maintained and the game is played.

  As shown in FIG. 6, from the RB gaming state of the bonus state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT2 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state and the RT2 gaming state of the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, in the RB game state of the bonus state, when the operation of (10) BB is completed, the bonus non-winning state is shifted to the RT2 game state. In addition, in the RB game state of the bonus state, when the operation of (9) RB is completed, it shifts to the RT2 game state of the bonus state. The operation of the RB is that a combination of symbols other than “out” is displayed eight times in the RB game state of the bonus state (eight times of winnings), and twelve games are performed in the RB game state of the bonus state. Or the operation of BB ends, the operation ends.

  In addition, RT2 game state of the bonus state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bits 0 to 3 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and bit 1 and bit 5 of the gaming state flag storing area) The data 1) is a gaming state that is shifted after the bonus RB gaming state. As shown in FIG. 6, from the RT2 gaming state of the bonus state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT2 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state and the RT4 gaming state of the bonus state. Specifically, in the RT2 game state of the bonus state, when the operation of (10) BB ends, the RT2 game state of the bonus non-winning state shifts (the RT game state is maintained before and after the bonus ends). In addition, in the bonus RT2 game state, when the winning combination related to (7) JACIN is determined as an internal winning combination, the bonus RT4 game state is entered.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 52 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Design placement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 8 represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence relationship between the 21 symbol positions "0" to "20" and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

  The symbol positions “0” to “20” indicate the positions of symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions “0” to “20” can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

  The types of symbols are "white 7", "red 7", "BAR", "lip 1", "lip 2", "lip 3", "cherry 1", "cherry 2", "watermelon" and " Includes "bell".

  The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 8 assigns the symbol located in the middle stage of the display window 4 when the reel index is detected (the symbol passing through the middle stage of the display window 4) to the symbol position “0”, and the reel 3L. In the order of movement in the rotational directions of 3C and 3R, the correspondence relationship is assigned in which the symbol positions “0” to “20” are assigned to each of the 21 symbols.

  In this way, by using the middle stage of the display window 4 as a reference, it is possible to specify the type of symbol located in the middle stage of the display window 4 for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Design code table>
Further, as shown in FIG. 8, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table and distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 8 represents codes for identifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  The symbols used in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment are, as described above, “white 7”, “red 7”, “BAR”, “lip 1”, “lip 2”, “lip 3”, “cherry 1”, There are 10 types of "cherry 2", "watermelon" and "bell".

  In the symbol code table, "00000001" is assigned as data to the "white 7" symbol (symbol code 1). "00000010" is assigned as data to the "red 7" symbol (symbol code 2). For the "BAR" symbol (symbol code 3), "00000011" is assigned as data.

  Similarly, for each of the symbols "Rip 1", "Rip 2", "Rip 3", "Cherry 1", "Cherry 2", "Watermelon" and "Bell" (symbol codes 4 to 10), “0000100” to “00001010” are assigned as data.

<Design combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 21. The symbol combination table is a combination of symbols determined in advance according to the type of privilege (combination), data to be stored in the main RAM 53 when the symbol combination is displayed, and a combination of the symbol is displayed. Stipulates the corresponding relationship with the privilege (the number of medals paid out).

  In the present embodiment, when the symbol combination displayed on the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R along the winning line matches the symbol combination (combination) defined in the symbol combination table, the winning is achieved. Is determined. Then, when it is determined that a prize has been won, the player is provided with benefits such as payout of medals, operation of a replay, and operation of a bonus game. If the symbol combination displayed along the pay line does not match any of the symbol combinations defined in the symbol combination table, the so-called “out” occurs. That is, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to the "off" is not defined in the symbol combination table, so that the symbol combination of "off" is defined. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the "combination" item may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define "combination".

  The data column in the symbol combination table defines information for identifying the symbol combinations displayed along the pay line. Specifically, in the data column, "storage area (data for designating a display combination storage area (see FIG. 50) described later)" in which data of a combination of corresponding symbols is stored, and the storage area “Data (data for designating a bit corresponding to a combination of symbols in 1-byte data) to be stored” is defined. In the present embodiment, by using 45 1-byte storage areas, the combination of each symbol is determined. For example, “R_RT transition eye A_01” shown in FIG. 9 is determined by storing 1 in bit 0 of the display combination storing area 1.

  The combination defined in the symbol combination table means the symbol combination of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the pay line when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. A combination name according to the role of the combination and the type of symbols forming the combination is defined in each combination.

  The payout number defined in the symbol combination table defines the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding symbol combination (combination) is displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 19, when the combination “C_CD bell” is displayed, 10 medals will be paid out.

  In the present embodiment, a combination of many symbols shown in FIGS. 9 to 21 is classified into a plurality of types according to their roles. The combination type column in the symbol combination table defines the role of each symbol combination. More specifically, in the present embodiment, a combination of a large number of symbols is classified into six types of “RT transition eye”, “BB”, “JACIN”, “replay”, “RT transition replay”, and “winning prize”.

  The role type “RT transition eye” is a combination (combination) of symbols in which the transition of the RT game state is performed when displayed, and corresponds to “R_RT transition eye A_01” to “R_RT transition eye F_08” shown in FIG. 9. .. These "RT transition eyes" are a combination of symbols displayed when an incorrect answer is made in the pressing order determined for each type of the pressing order bell, and are the "bell spilled eyes" described above. That is, if the press order bell is determined as the internal winning combination and the press order is incorrect, there is a possibility that one of the symbol combinations corresponding to the combination type “RT transition eye” is displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to the role type “RT transition eye” is displayed, there is a possibility of transitioning to the RT1 gaming state.

  The combination type “BB” is a symbol combination (combination) in which the operation of BB is performed when displayed, and corresponds to “C_BB1” to “C_BB5_02” illustrated in FIG. 10. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination type “BB” is displayed, the operation of BB is started and the game state is shifted to the RT0 game state.

  The combination type “JACIN” is a combination of symbols in which the RB is operated when displayed, and corresponds to “C_JACIN1” to “C_JACIN3” shown in FIG. 10. When the symbol combination corresponding to the combination type “JACIN” is displayed, the operation of the RB is started, and after the operation of the RB is completed, the RT2 game state is entered.

  The role type “re-game” is a combination of symbols in which the re-game is operated when displayed, and corresponds to “C_CU white” to “C_KY lip_09” shown in FIG. 10. When a combination of symbols corresponding to the role type “replay” is displayed, the replay operation is performed. If a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination type “replay” is displayed, the transition to the RT game state is not performed.

  The role type "RT transition re-game" is a combination of symbols (combination) in which the transition of the RT game state may be performed along with the operation of the re-game when displayed, and "C_CU Lip" shown in FIGS. 11 to 17. "_01" to "C_Sui FKF_18" correspond to this. When the symbol combination corresponding to the role type “RT transition re-game” is displayed, the re-game is operated, and there is a possibility of shifting to various RT game states depending on the symbol combination.

  For example, when "C_CU REP_01" to "C_CU REP_03" shown in FIG. 11 are displayed, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT1 gaming state. These "C_CU Lip_01" to "C_CU Lip_03" are combinations of symbols that may be displayed when an incorrect answer is made in the pressing order determined for each type of pressing order Lip described above, and the "RT1" described above. "Transition Lip". That is, when the push order lip is determined as the internal winning combination and the push order is incorrect, any one of “C_CU lip_01” to “C_CU lip_03” is displayed.

  Further, when "C_C Lip 01" to "C_Bell FKC_12" shown in FIGS. 11 to 13 are displayed, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT4 gaming state. These "C_C lip 01" to "C_bell FKC_12" are the above-mentioned "RT4 transition lip". More specifically, when the above-mentioned push order lip is determined as an internal winning combination and the push order is correct, one of “C_CU lip — 01” to “C_CU lip — 03” is displayed. Further, when the above-mentioned “F_chance lip 2” or “F_slip chance lip 2” is determined as the internal winning combination, any one of “C_C lip 01” to “C_bell FKC_12” is displayed regardless of the pressing order. It will be.

  Further, when "C_CD Cherip A_01" to "C_Sui FKF_18" shown in FIGS. 14 to 17 are displayed, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT3 gaming state. These "C_CD cherip A_01" to "C_sui FKF_18" are the above-mentioned "RT3 transition lip". More specifically, when "F_Slip Chance Lip 1" or "F_Cherry Lip" described above is determined as the internal winning combination, any one of "C_CD Cherip A_01" to "C_Sui FKF_18" is irrespective of the pressing order. Will be displayed.

  The winning combination “winning prize” is a combination of symbols for paying out medals when displayed, and corresponds to “C_CD watermelon” to “C_B bell BB_04” shown in FIGS. 18 to 21. When the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "winning" is displayed, the number of medals specified in the payout number column of the symbol combination table is paid out. When a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination "winning" is displayed, the RT game state is not changed.

  The “C_CD bell” shown in FIG. 19 is a combination of symbols displayed when the correct answer is given in the pressing order determined for each type of the pressing order bell described above. Further, among the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination “winning”, the symbol combination of the payout number “3” is displayed when the answer is incorrect in the pushing order determined for each type of the pushing order bell. It is a possible combination of symbols. That is, when the answer is incorrect in the pressing order determined for each type of pressing order bell, the combination of symbols of the payout number "3" among the combinations of symbols corresponding to the winning combination "winning", or the winning combination "RT transition" A combination of symbols corresponding to "eyes" will be displayed. In Pachi-slot 1, since there are 6 possible pressing orders for the stopping operation, the symbol combination displayed in the case of incorrect answers in the pressing order is set arbitrarily from the 5 incorrect pressing orders. be able to.

<Internal lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 22 to FIG. 26, an internal lottery table that is referred to when determining an internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each gaming state, and defines lottery value information about the data pointer corresponding to the winning combination. In the RT0 gaming state of the above bonus non-winning state, the internal winning combination is determined by using the lottery value defined in the “RT0” column of the internal lottery table, and similarly the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state to the bonus non-winning state. In the RT4 gaming state of the winning state, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery values defined in the "RT1" to "RT4" columns of the internal lottery table. Further, in the RT5 gaming state between the flags, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery value defined in the “RT5” column of the internal lottery table. Further, in the RT0 gaming state of the bonus state, the internal winning combination is determined by using the lottery value defined in the “BB (RT0)” column of the internal lottery table, and similarly, the RT4 gaming state or the bonus state of the bonus state. In the RT2 gaming state of the state, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery value defined in the “BB in (RT4)” or “BB in (RT2)” column of the internal lottery table, and the RB gaming state in the bonus state Then, the internal lottery combination is determined using the lottery value defined in the “BB (RB)” column of the internal lottery table.

  The internal lottery table basically changes the type and winning probability of a replay related to an internal winning combination determined as an internal winning combination according to the type of RT gaming state, and determines whether or not a bonus (BB or RB) is activated. The type of winning combination (other than replay and carryover combination) determined as an internal winning combination and the winning probability change.

  The data pointer is data acquired as a result of lottery performed by referring to the internal lottery table, and is data used for determining the storage area type and 1-byte data. As the data pointer, a small win / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are individually defined corresponding to each of a plurality of winning numbers.

  In the present embodiment, random number values for lottery extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values “0 to 65535” are sequentially subtracted by lottery values according to each winning combination, and whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative. An internal lottery is carried out by making a determination (whether a so-called "carry" has occurred).

  Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the data (that is, the Dake pointer) to which this is assigned is determined. That is, the winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “lottery value corresponding to each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (65536)”.

<Comparison table of internal winning combination and symbol combination>
27 to 45 are comparative tables showing the correspondence relationship with the symbol combinations (combinations) that can be displayed on the pay line in each internal winning combination. A circle in each correspondence table indicates a combination (combination) of symbols that can be displayed on the winning line in the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. In the winning combination, the correspondence table is omitted for the symbol combinations that cannot be displayed on the pay line (for example, in the winning combination “F_black-black-black” shown in FIG. 27, FIG. Since the combination of symbols shown in (1) cannot be displayed, the correspondence table is not shown).

  With reference to FIG. 27, for example, when the winning combination "F_black black black" is an internal winning combination, the symbol combination of the combination name "C_BB1" can be stopped and displayed on the winning line. Referring to FIG. 10, the combination name "C_BB1" is a combination of symbols in which "BAR-BAR-BAR" is displayed along the pay line. The correspondence table shown in the figure does not specify the case where the winning combination is “out”, but this is a combination of all the symbols defined by the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 9 to 21. Indicates that the display of is not allowed.

  In the pachi-slot 1, the main control circuit 41 changes the stop control according to the internal winning combination and the gaming state, and when a predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence relationship shown in FIGS. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped so that a symbol combination (combination) can be displayed. The correspondence tables shown in FIGS. 27 to 45 enumerate all combinations of symbols that may be displayed when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, but the main control circuit 41 stops the operation. Since the control differs not only according to the internal winning combination but also according to the current gaming state, even a combination of symbols marked with a circle corresponding to the winning combination may not be displayed depending on the gaming state.

<Outline of the winning role>
This point will be described in detail with reference to the outline of the winning combination shown in FIGS. 46 and 47. As shown in FIG. 46, when “out” is determined as the internal winning combination, display of all the symbol combinations defined by the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 9 to 21 is not permitted. In addition, in the RT4 gaming state in which there is a high probability that the winning combination of the replay is determined as the internal winning combination, the probability that the “outfall” is determined as the internal winning combination decreases as the winning probability of the winning combination of the replay increases. Therefore, in the following, there is a case where the “out” in the RT4 gaming state is used as a rare combination (handled as a so-called “pure out”).

  In addition, when any of “F_black-black-black”, “F_red-red-red”, “F_white-white-white”, “F_red-red-white”, and “F_white-white-red” is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence shown in FIG. 27 is taken. Display of combinations of related symbols is permitted. In addition, when any of “F_black / black / black”, “F_red / red / red”, “F_white / white / white”, “F_red / red / white”, and “F_white / white / red” is determined as the internal winning combination, as described above, The gaming state becomes the RT5 gaming state between the flags.

  Further, when either “F_maintenance rep 1” or “F_maintenance rep 2” is determined as the internal winning combination, the display of the symbol combination having the correspondence shown in FIGS. 28 to 32 is permitted. In addition, in "F_maintenance rep 1" and "F_maintenance rep 2", even if the corresponding symbol combination is displayed, the RT game state is not changed.

  Further, "F_123 lip" to "F_2nd lip" are the above-mentioned push order lip, and when any of these push order lip is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence relationship shown in FIGS. Display of a combination of symbols that the user has is permitted. More specifically, when the answer is correct in the pressing order determined for each type of pressing order lip, the RT4 transition lip (FIG. 11 to FIG. 11) among the combinations of symbols having the corresponding relationships shown in FIGS. Display of a combination of symbols according to (see FIG. 13) is permitted, and when the pressing order is incorrect, the above-mentioned RT1 transition lip (see FIG. 11) of the combinations of symbols having the corresponding relationships shown in FIGS. ) Is allowed to display a combination of symbols.

  The name of the winning combination as a push order lip is determined based on the correct push order. For example, “1” in the name “F_123 Lip” indicates that the stop operation is “left”, “2” indicates that the stop operation is “middle”, and “3” indicates that the stop operation is “right”. ". Then, “123” indicates the correct pressing order, and in the case of “F_123 lip”, the first stop operation is “left”, the second stop operation is “middle”, and the third stop operation is “right”. It means that the answer is correct when the value is, and the answer is incorrect when the pressing order is other than that. Similarly, in the case of “F_231 lip”, the correct answer is obtained when the first stop operation is “middle”, the second stop operation is “right”, and the third stop operation is “left”, and in the case of other pressing order It is shown to be incorrect. In addition, “F — 2nd lip” indicates that the correct answer is given when the first stop operation is “medium”, and the incorrect answer is given when the pushing order is other than that.

  Returning to FIG. 46, "F_123 upper stage 7 ten" to "F_2nd cross 7 set" are not only internal winning combinations but also winning combinations whose stop control is different depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the bonus non-winning state, "F_123 upper 7 ten" to "F_2nd cross 7 set" are the pressing order lips described above, and when the answer is correct in the pressing order, the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. 28 to 32 are shown. Display of the symbol combination corresponding to the above-mentioned RT4 transition lip (see FIGS. 11 to 13) of the symbol combinations having “” is permitted, and when the pressing order is incorrect, the correspondence shown in FIGS. The display of the symbol combination corresponding to the above-described RT1 transition lip (see FIG. 11) of the symbol combinations that the user has is permitted.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, “F_123 upper 7 ten” to “F_2nd cross 7 set” are “F_123 upper 7 ten among the symbol combinations of the combination names“ C_CU white ”to“ C_B white_02 ”shown in FIG. ~ "F_2nd cross 7 assortment" is allowed to be displayed in the combination of symbols. Here, the symbol combinations of the combination names "C_CU white" to "C_B white_02" are pseudo lines other than the winning line among the lines that linearly connect the upper, middle and lower stages of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. It is a combination of symbols in which three or two "white 7" symbols or "red 7" symbols are displayed on the line. In the following, a combination of symbols in which three "white 7" symbols or "red 7" symbols are displayed may be referred to as "7 set lip", and also "white 7" symbol or "red 7" The combination of the symbols in which two of the symbols are displayed may be referred to as "7-inspired lip". Of the combination names "C_CU white" to "C_B white_02", the combination of symbols without "FK (fake)" attached to the combination name is "7 sets of lip", and the combination name is "FK (fake)" The combination of symbols marked with is "7-inspired lip". The line connecting the upper, middle and lower stages of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R in a straight line is a top line connecting the upper stages, a center line connecting the middle stages, a bottom line connecting the lower stages, a crossdown line connecting to the lower right, and There are 5 types of cross-up lines that connect to the right, but since the winning line is a cross-down line, "7 matching rep" or "7 fluttering rep" are 4 pseudo lines other than the cross-down line. 3 or 2 of either the "white 7" symbol or the "red 7" symbol will be displayed along any of the above.

  With reference to the correspondence relationship shown in FIG. 28, in the bonus state, the display of “7 twisting lip” is permitted for “F_123 upper row 7 ten” and “F_132 lower row 7 ten”. In addition, in the bonus state, the display of “7-set Lip” is permitted for “F_312 upper 7 sets” to “F_2nd cross 7 set”.

  Further, "F_J1 upper stage 7 rep", "F_J1 lower stage 7 rep" and "F_J1 cross 7 rep" are not only internal winning combinations, but also winning combinations in which stop control is different depending on a game state. Specifically, in the bonus non-winning state, the “F_J1 upper tier 7 rep”, “F_J1 lower tier 7 rep” and “F_J1 cross 7 rep” are the RT4 transition lips described above regardless of the pressing order (see FIGS. 11 to 13). ) Is allowed to display a combination of symbols. In addition, in the bonus non-winning state, "F_J1 upper tier 7 rep", "F_J1 lower tier 7 rep" and "F_J1 cross 7 rep" are determined as internal winning combinations only in the RT4 gaming state, so in the bonus non-winning state , "F_J1 upper stage 7 rep", "F_J1 lower stage 7 rep" and "F_J1 cross 7 rep" are determined as the internal winning combination, the RT4 gaming state is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, the stop control of “F_J1 upper stage 7 rep”, “F_J1 lower stage 7 rep” and “F_J1 cross 7 rep” has different stop control depending on the type of the winning combination carried over as the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the bonus state, when "F_JACIN1" is carried over as an internal winning combination (that is, "F_J1 upper tier 7 rep", "F_J1 lower tier 7 rep" or "F_J1 cross 7 rep" and "F_JACIN1". "And two are determined as internal winning combinations)", "F_J1 upper tier 7 rep", "F_J1 lower tier 7 rep" and "F_J1 cross 7 rep" are "7 complete rep" and other than the cross down line Three "white 7" symbols or "red 7" symbols will be displayed along any of the four pseudo lines of.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, when “F_JACIN2” or “F_JACIN3” is carried over as an internal winning combination (that is, either “F_J1 upper row 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower row 7 lip” or “F_J1 cross 7 lip” and “F_J1 cross 7 lip”). If either "F_JACIN2" or "F_JACIN3" is determined as an internal winning combination), "F_J1 upper tier 7 rep", "F_J1 lower tier 7 rep" and "F_J1 cross 7 rep" are "normal in bonus". “Rip”, and among the symbol combinations having the correspondence shown in FIGS. 28 to 32, the symbol combinations other than the “7-repeat lip” are displayed.

  The state in which “F_JACIN1” is carried over as an internal winning combination may be referred to as “between JAC1 flags”, and similarly, the state in which “F_JACIN2” is carried over as an internal winning combination is “between JAC2 flags”, The state in which “F_JACIN3” is carried over as an internal winning combination may be referred to as “between JAC3 flags”.

  Further, "F_J2 chance rep 1" to "F_J2 cherry rep" are not only internal winning combinations, but also winning combinations whose stop control is different depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the bonus non-winning state, “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” are combinations of symbols according to the RT4 transition lip (see FIGS. 11 to 13) regardless of the pressing order. Display is allowed. In the bonus non-winning state, since "F_J2 chance rep 1" to "F_J2 cherry rep" are determined as the internal winning combination only in the RT4 gaming state, "F_J1 upper 7 rep" in the bonus non-winning state, When "F_J1 lower tier 7 rep" and "F_J1 cross 7 rep" are determined as the internal winning combination, the RT4 gaming state is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, the stop control of “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” differs depending on the type of winning combination related to JACIN carried over as an internal winning combination. Specifically, in the bonus state, when “F_JACIN2” is carried over as an internal winning combination (that is, either “F_J1 upper tier 7 rep”, “F_J1 lower tier 7 rep” or “F_J1 cross 7 rep” and “F_JACIN2”. 2) is determined as an internal winning combination), “F_J2 chance rep 1” to “F_J2 cherry rep” are “chance rep” and are symbols having the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. 33 to 39. The display of the symbol combination of any one of the combinations of “C_B lip 01” to “C_sui FKF_18” is permitted.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, when “F_JACIN1” or “F_JACIN3” is carried over as an internal winning combination (that is, any one of “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” and “F_JACIN1” or “F_JACIN3”). When two of the heels are determined as the internal winning combination), "F_J2 chance rep 1" to "F_J2 cherry rep" are "normal rep during bonus" and have the correspondence shown in FIGS. 33 to 39. Of the combinations of symbols, the symbol combinations other than "chance lip" are displayed.

  Further, "F_J3 chance rep 1" to "F_J3 cherry rep" are not only internal winning combinations, but also winning combinations with stop control different depending on the game state. Specifically, in the bonus non-winning state, “F_J3 chance lip 1” to “F_J3 cherry lip” are combinations of symbols corresponding to the RT4 transition lip (see FIGS. 11 to 13) regardless of the pressing order. Display is allowed. In the bonus non-winning state, since "F_J3 chance lip 1" to "F_J3 cherry lip" are determined as the internal winning combination only in the RT4 gaming state, "F_J3 chance lip 1" -in the bonus non-winning state. When "F_J3 Cherry Rep" is determined as the internal winning combination, the RT4 gaming state is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, “F_J3 chance rep 1” to “F_J3 cherry rep” are “chance rep” regardless of the type of winning combination related to JACIN carried over as an internal winning combination, and are shown in FIGS. 33 to 39. Display of any symbol combination of “C_B Lip 01” to “C_Sui FKF_18” among the symbol combinations having a correspondence relationship is permitted.

  Further, when any of “F_chance rep 1” to “F_common bell” is determined as the internal winning combination, the display of the symbol combination having the correspondence relationship shown in FIGS. 33 to 45 is permitted. The characteristics such as the transition of the RT game state triggered by “F_chance rep 1” to “F_common bell” are as shown in FIG. 46.

  Subsequently, referring to FIG. 47, “F_123 bell A” to “F_321 bell D” are basically the above-mentioned push order bells, and any of these push order bells is determined as an internal winning combination. In this case, the combination of symbols having the correspondence shown in FIGS. 40 to 45 is allowed to be displayed. More specifically, when the answer is correct in the pressing order determined for each type of pressing order bell, "C_CD bell (see FIG. 19)" of the symbol combinations having the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. 40 to 45. The display of a combination of symbols according to is permitted. On the other hand, when the answer is incorrect in the pressing order determined for each type of pressing order bell, the pattern corresponding to the above-mentioned bell spilled eye (see FIG. 9) among the combinations of symbols having the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. 40 to 45. Or the combination of symbols with the payout number “3” in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 19 to 21) is permitted.

  The name of the winning combination as the push order bell is determined based on the correct push order. For example, “1” in the name “F_123 Bell A” indicates that the stop operation is “left”, “2” indicates that the stop operation is “middle”, and “3” indicates that the stop operation is “middle”. "Right". Then, “123” indicates the correct pressing order, and in the case of “F_123 Bell A”, the first stop operation is “left”, the second stop operation is “middle”, and the third stop operation is “right”. It means that the correct answer is given when it is ", and the incorrect answer is given when the pushing order is other than that." Similarly, in the case of “F_231 Bell A”, the correct answer is obtained when the first stop operation is “middle”, the second stop operation is “right”, and the third stop operation is “left”, and the other pressing order is the same. In some cases, it is incorrect.

  Also, among the pressing order bells, “F_123 bell C”, “F_123 bell D”, “F_132 bell C”, “F_132 bell D”, “F_213 bell C”, “F_213 bell D”, “F_231 bell C”, “F_231 bell D”, and “F_312 bell”. “C”, “F_312 bell D”, “F_321 bell C”, and “F_321 bell D” are not only internal winning combinations but also winning combinations whose stop control is different depending on the gaming state. Specifically, between the non-flag (RT0 gaming state of bonus non-winning state ~ RT4 gaming state) is the above-mentioned pushing order bell, when the correct answer in the pushing order, the symbol having the correspondence shown in FIG. 40 to FIG. 45. Of the combinations of symbols, the display of the symbol combinations corresponding to “C_CD bell (see FIG. 19)” is permitted, and when the answer is incorrect in the pressing order, among the symbol combinations having the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. 40 to 45. It is permitted to display a combination of symbols according to the above-mentioned bell crevice (see FIG. 9), or a combination of symbols having a payout number of “3” (see FIGS. 19 to 21) in the symbol combination table.

  On the other hand, in the state between flags (RT5 game state of the state between flags), "F_123 bell C" "F_123 bell D" "F_132 bell C" "F_132 bell D" "F_213 bell C" "F_213 bell D" "F_231 bell D" “C” “F_231 bell D” “F_312 bell C” “F_312 bell D” “F_321 bell C” and “F_321 bell D” are combinations of symbols having the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. 40 to 45 regardless of the pressing order. Display of a combination of symbols according to "C_CD bell (see FIG. 19)" is permitted.

  Further, when any of “F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, and “F_JACIN3” is determined as the internal winning combination, the display of the combination of symbols having the correspondence relationship shown in FIG. 27 is permitted. When any of “F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, and “F_JACIN3” is determined as the internal winning combination, “F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, and “F_JACIN3” determined as the internal winning combination have a combination of corresponding symbols. Until it is displayed (only during the bonus state), it will be carried over as an internal winning combination.

  Further, when either "F_RB combination A" or "F_RB combination B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the display of the combination of symbols having the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. 40 to 45 is permitted.

[Various storage areas on the main control side]
48 to 54 are diagrams showing examples of various storage areas stored in the main RAM 53.

<Internal winning combination storage area>
The internal winning combination storing area shown in FIG. 48 is configured by 45 storage areas of the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 45. The size of each storage area of these internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 45 is 1 byte.

  Therefore, the total size of the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 45 is 45 bytes. In the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 45, data determined based on the internal winning combination (data indicating a combination of symbols that can be stopped according to the internal winning combination) is stored. In the illustrated internal winning combination storing area, for example, bit 2 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 corresponds to “C_BB1” indicating a combination of symbols that can be stopped when the internal winning combination is “F_black black black”. ..

<Carry-over combination storage area>
The internal carryover combination storage area shown in FIG. 49 is a storage area having a size of 2 bytes, which is composed of two internal storage areas 1 and 2. In the carryover combination storing area, data relating to the carryover combination is stored.

  For example, by storing “1” in bit 2 of the carryover combination storing area 1, it is possible to determine that the combination name “C_BB1” is in a winning state of “F_black-black-black” which can be stopped. The state in which "1" is stored in bit 2 of the carryover combination storing area 1 is held until the symbol combination corresponding to the combination name "C_BB1" is displayed on the pay line.

  That is, when "F_black-black-black" is won, the bit 2 in the carryover combination storing area 1 is set to "2" in at least one unit game until the combination of these bonus symbols is displayed on the pay line as a display combination. The state in which "1" is stored is retained. From the unit game that wins the bonus to the unit game that wins the prize, maintaining the state where "1" is stored in bit 2 is called so-called "carryover". Also, "F_black-black-black", "F_red-red-red", "F_white-white-white", "F_red-red-white", "F_white-white-red", "F_JACIN1" corresponding to the data (combination of patterns) stored in the carryover combination storage area. "F_JACIN2" and "F_JACIN3" are referred to as "Carryover hand".

  When the player performs a stop operation and each of the rotations of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, the internal winning combination storing area is initialized, but the carryover combination storing area is not initialized. By doing so, the state of "carry-over" can be maintained.

<Display combination storage area>
The display combination storing area shown in FIG. 50 is configured by 45 storage areas of the display combination storing areas 1 to 45. The size of each of the display combination storage areas 1 to 45 is 1 byte.

  Therefore, the total size of the display combination storing areas 1 to 45 is 45 bytes. The display combination storage areas 1 to 45 store data determined based on the data (storage area type) defined by each symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 9 to 21. The value of the display combination storing area is used by the main CPU 51 to identify the display combination after all of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped.

  In the illustrated display combination storing area, for example, bits 0 to 7 of the display combination storing area 1 correspond to “R_RT transition eye A_01” to “R_RT transition eye C_01”, respectively.

<Game status flag storage area>
The game state flag storage area shown in FIG. 51 stores a flag for identifying a game state managed by the main control circuit 41, and has a size of 1 byte.

  Bits 0 to 6 of the gaming status flag storage area are set to "RT1 gaming status", "RT2 gaming status", "RT3 gaming status", "RT4 gaming status", "RT5 gaming status", "BB gaming status", and "RB gaming status", respectively. It corresponds.

<Operation stop button storage area>
The operation stop button storage area shown in FIG. 52 has a size of 1 byte. Bits 4 to 6 are storage areas showing stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R capable of detecting a stop operation by the player, that is, valid stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R.

  Bits 0 to 2 are storage areas indicating the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R in which the stop operation corresponding to the valid stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R was detected immediately before. In the present embodiment, bit 3 and bit 7 are unused and "0" is stored.

  Bit 0 corresponds to the left stop button 17L. When the left stop button 17L is operated by the player, "1" is stored in bit 0. Bit 1 corresponds to the middle stop button 17C. When the middle stop button 17C is operated by the player, "1" is stored in bit 1. Bit 2 corresponds to the right stop button 17R. When the right stop button 17R is operated by the player, "1" is stored in bit 2.

  Bit 4 corresponds to the left stop button 17L. When the left stop button 17L is valid, "1" is stored in bit 4. Bit 5 corresponds to the middle stop button 17C. When the middle stop button 17C is valid, "1" is stored in bit 5. Bit 6 corresponds to the right stop button 17R. When the right stop button 17R is valid, "1" is stored in bit 6.

  In the present embodiment, the valid stop button means that the stop operation can be detected. Further, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R corresponding to the reels that are rotating at a constant speed, and the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R capable of detecting the stop operation are referred to as effective stop buttons.

<Pressing order storage area>
The pressing order storage area shown in FIG. 53 is an area for storing information indicating the pressing order of the three stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R. The pressing order storage area has a size of 1 byte, bits 0 to 5 are used, bits 6 and 7 are unused, and "0" is stored.

  Bit 0 corresponds to the pressing order “left → middle → right”, and “1” is stored (turned on) in bit 0 when the pressing order is “left → middle → right”. Similarly, if the pressing order is “left → right → middle”, “1” is stored (turned on) in bit 1, and if the pressing order is “middle → left → right”, “1” is stored in bit2. Is stored (ON), "1" is stored (ON) in bit 3 in the case of "middle → right → left", and "1" is stored in bit 4 in the case of "right → left → middle" (ON), and if “right → middle → left”, “1” is stored (on) in bit 5.

<Design code storage area>
The symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 54 is configured similarly to the display combination storage area shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

  The symbol code storage area stores data indicating a combination of symbols that may be displayed on the spinning reel. For example, when all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotating, all combinations of symbols may be displayed, so "1" is stored in all the corresponding bits of the symbol code storage area. It After that, when the left reel 3L is stopped (the reels 3C and 3R are rotated), the bit corresponding to the symbol combination that cannot be displayed due to the stop of the left reel 3L is updated to "0".

[Sub-game state transition flow]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a game state controlled by the sub control circuit 42 (sub CPU 81) of the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment and its transition flow will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 manages the game state based on whether or not to notify the content of the stop operation advantageous to the player. As shown in FIG. 55, the sub-control circuit 42 distinguishes a normal game state, an ART game state, and a bonus state. Here, the general game state is basically a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, the bonus state is basically a game state that is advantageous to the player, and the ART game state is a game state. This is the most advantageous game state for the player. In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the player will play the game so as to shift from the general game state (while sandwiching the bonus state depending on the situation) to the most advantageous ART game state.

  The general game state is a game state corresponding to the RT0 to RT4 game states (see FIG. 6) of the bonus non-winning state on the main side, and is a non-winning game state for the ART lottery on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 55, the normal game state is composed of a normal game state, a high-probability game state, and a CZ (chance zone). The normal gaming state, the high-probability gaming state and CZ are gaming states with different transition probabilities to the ART gaming state, the normal gaming state has the lowest transition probability to the ART gaming state, and the high-probability gaming state and CZ are Compared with the normal game state, the game state has a high probability of transition to the ART game state.

  The normal gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the RT0 to RT4 gaming states (see FIG. 6) of the bonus non-winning state on the main side, and is a non-winning gaming state on the ART lottery on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 55, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal game state to the ART game state, CZ, high-probability game state, and bonus state.

  Specifically, in the normal gaming state, the transfer lottery (A) to ART and CZ is performed, and in this transfer lottery, if the transition to (A1) ART is won, the sub control circuit 42 causes the normal gaming state. The game state is transferred from to the ART game state. In addition, in this transition lottery, when the transition to (A2) CZ is won, the sub control circuit 42 shifts the game state from the normal game state to the CZ. The details of the transfer lottery (A) during the normal game state will be described later, but in the normal game state, the transition to the ART and CZ is performed at two timings, one when the reel starts rotating and the other when the reel stops during one game. The lottery (A) is performed.

  In addition, in the normal gaming state, a transition lottery (B) to the high-probability gaming state is also performed. Specifically, in the normal gaming state, when the main side gaming state is controlled to shift to the bonus non-winning RT4 gaming state, the bonus non-winning RT4 gaming state shifts to the high-probability gaming state (B) Is done. If this transition lottery (B) is won, the sub control circuit 42 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the high-probability gaming state. The details of the transition lottery (B) in the normal game state will be described later, but in this transition lottery, the role related to the replay in the bonus non-winning RT4 game state which is the sub-side normal game state is an internal winning combination. Transfer lottery (B) is performed based on the determined number of times.

  Further, in the normal gaming state, (6) a combination of symbols corresponding to the BB carried over is displayed, and when the BB operates, the sub control circuit 42 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the bonus state. Since the transition to the bonus state is common to the main side and the sub side, detailed description thereof will be omitted below.

  Subsequently, CZ is a gaming state corresponding to the RT0 to RT4 gaming states (see FIG. 6) of the bonus non-winning state on the main side, and is a non-winning gaming state on the ART lottery on the sub side. CZ is a gaming state (chance zone) in which there is a high probability of shifting to the ART gaming state, and 30 games are continued at the maximum. The CZ is a so-called completion type chance zone, and when the maximum CZ of 30 games continues, the ART transition is confirmed. On the other hand, during the CZ, the transfer lottery to the ART is performed, and when the transfer lottery is “maintained”, the CZ ends. Here, even if the transition lottery is “maintained”, if the transition lottery is won, the transition to the ART is performed, but it is more advantageous when the CZ continues for 30 games. Since there is a possibility of shifting to the ART gaming state, during the CZ, basically, the game is played without receiving the transition lottery, and when the transition lottery is performed, the transition lottery is set to "invalid". By playing the game as described above, it is desired to continue 30 games without ending the CZ. The “maintenance / invalidity” of the transfer lottery during CZ will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 55, there is a possibility of shifting from the CZ to the normal game state, the ART game state, and the bonus state. Specifically, when (C1) is won in the transfer lottery (C) to the ART performed during CZ, the sub-control circuit 42 shifts the game state from CZ to the ART game state, and in this transfer lottery ( C2) When not winning, the sub control circuit 42 shifts the game state from CZ to the normal game state.

  Subsequently, the high-probability gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the RT4 gaming state of the main side bonus non-winning state (see FIG. 6), and is a non-winning gaming state in the sub lot ART lottery, and It is a gaming state that is won in the lottery (B) for shifting to the high-probability gaming state during the normal gaming state. As shown in FIG. 55, there is a possibility of shifting from the high-probability game state to the normal game state, the ART game state, and the bonus state.

  Specifically, in the high-probability game state, the transition lottery (D) to the ART is performed, and in this transition lottery, if the transition to (D1) ART is won, the sub-control circuit 42 sets the high-probability game state. The game state is transferred from to the ART game state. The details of the transfer lottery (D) during the high-probability game state will be described later, but basically, like the transfer lottery (A) during the normal game state, at the start of reel rotation during one game and the reels. The lottery (D) for shifting to ART is performed at two timings when stopped. The transition lottery (D) in the high-probability game state has a higher probability of winning the transition to ART than the transition lottery (A) in the normal game state.

  The high-probability gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 6) of the bonus non-winning state on the main side, and in the control on the main side, (E) RT4 gaming state shifts to RT1 gaming state. When the control is performed, the sub control circuit 42 shifts the gaming state from the high-probability gaming state to the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state).

  Here, as described above, the RT4 game state of the bonus non-winning state on the main side is the correct answer to the push order lip in the RT0 game state of the bonus non-winning state of the main side (normal game state of the sub side). It is a game state to be transferred. As described above, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal game state, which is the most basic game state (= disadvantageous to the player), when the correct answer is given to the push-order lip, the high-probability game state is entered and the ART is performed. Make the transition of. In other words, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, if the player accidentally shifts to the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, a penalty such as not performing the ART lottery is given. Instead, it puts it in an advantageous state for the player. As a result, in the pachi-slot 1, the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state that has not been won in the ART lottery can be set as the chance of transition to the ART gaming state, and the bonus non-attached bonus ART is not attached. It is possible to enhance the interest of the RT4 gaming state in the winning state.

  Also, for the player, if the correct answer is given in the normal game state in the order of pushing, there is a possibility of shifting to the high-probability game state, which is a transition chance section to the ART game state, so a strategy for the stop operation in the normal game state And the interest during the normal gaming state can be enhanced. That is, in terms of game play in which a penalty section is a game state that is accidentally shifted by a player's stop operation, the stop operation during the normal game state is simple (for example, the first stop operation is performed on the left reel so as not to receive a penalty). Must be done). In this regard, like the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the player can freely perform the stop operation during the normal game state by performing the lottery for shifting to the ART without imposing a penalty, and the normal game state. Not only the playability in the middle but also the operability can be improved.

  By the way, when the game state accidentally shifted by the stop operation is set as the transition chance section to the ART game state instead of the penalty section, the profit on the player side and the profit on the game shop side are prevented from giving an excessive profit to the player. It is necessary to adjust the balance with. There are many possible methods for adjusting the balance, and for example, there is an adjustment method in which it is easier to win the transfer lottery as compared to the normal game state, while setting a transition opportunity section to the ART game state. With the method, the meaning of the transition opportunity section is weakened. In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in this respect, as shown in FIG. 6, an RT1 game state in the bonus non-winning state of a fixed number of games that does not shift to the RT4 game state in the bonus non-winning state is provided. I am trying. By providing the RT1 game state in the bonus non-winning state of such a fixed number of games, it is possible to adjust the frequency of accidental transition by the stop operation, and as a result, the profit of the player side and the profit of the game store side The balance can be adjusted. As a result, it is possible to further diversify the variables for adjusting the profit balance of both parties, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine rich in game playability.

  Subsequently, the bonus state is a game state corresponding to one of the bonus states on the main side (see FIG. 6). As shown in FIG. 55, there is a possibility of shifting from the bonus state to the normal game state (normal game state) and the ART game state. Specifically, in the transition lottery (F) to the ART performed in the bonus state, after the operation of BB when (F1) is won, the sub control circuit 42 shifts the game state from the bonus state to the ART game state. If the (F2) non-win is selected for this transition lottery, after the operation of the BB is completed, the sub control circuit 42 shifts the game state from the bonus state to the general game state. The details of the transfer lottery (F) in the bonus state will be described later, but in the bonus state, when the combination of the symbols of the above-mentioned “7 complete rep” can be displayed, the player wins ART, and BB. If a predetermined lottery is carried out at the end of the operation of, the ART will be won.

  Subsequently, the ART gaming state is a gaming state that informs the content of the stop operation advantageous to the player, corresponds to the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state on the main side (see FIG. 6), and on the sub side. It is a game state in which the lottery is won. In the ART gaming state, for example, when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols with a large number of payouts (C_CD bell with a payout number of 10) is displayed so that the win push order bell is displayed. Notify the pressing order of correct answers. Further, in the ART gaming state, for example, when the push order lip is determined as the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols for maintaining the RT4 gaming state in which the winning combination of the replay is highly likely to be determined as the internal winning combination (for example, In order to display the (RT4 transition rip), the winning push order lips are notified of the correct push order.

  In addition, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, when the teammate character and the enemy character battle (battle) during the ART game state and the teammate character wins, the ART game state is continued, and when the enemy character wins, End the gaming state. In order to have such a game property, the ART game state is composed of an enemy determination ART and a battle ART as shown in FIG.

  The enemy determination ART is an ART game state during a period in which the type of the enemy character competing against the teammate character is determined. As shown in FIG. 55, there is a possibility that a battle ART and a bonus state may shift from the enemy determination ART. Specifically, in (G) enemy determination ART, when the enemy character is determined, the sub control circuit 42 shifts the game state from the enemy determination ART to the battle ART. The method of determining the enemy character during the enemy determination ART will be described later.

  In addition, the battle ART is an ART game state during a period in which the enemy character and the teammate character determined in the enemy determination ART compete with each other. As shown in FIG. 55, there is a possibility that the battle ART may shift to the enemy determination ART, the normal game state (normal game state), and the bonus state. Specifically, in the battle (H) during the battle ART, when the (H1) ally character wins, the sub control circuit 42 shifts the game state from the battle ART to the enemy determination ART, and the (H2) enemy character wins. Then, the sub control circuit 42 shifts the game state from the battle ART to the general game state. The method of determining the outcome of the battle (H) during the battle ART will be described later.

[Correspondence between main side / sub side of winning combination]
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a part of the correspondence relationship between the types of winning combinations managed on the main (main control circuit 41) side and the abbreviations of winning combinations managed on the sub (sub control circuit 42) side. On the sub side, the winning combination on the main side is managed by the abbreviations shown in the correspondence table of FIG. Note that the "out-of-line" may be "out-of-line" only during the RT4 game state. In addition, the correspondence relationship between the main side and the sub side of the winning combination can be made different depending on the gaming state. In this respect, the correspondence shown in FIG. 56 shows the correspondence in the gaming state other than the bonus state, and the correspondence in the bonus state is shown in FIG. 81.

[Outline of effects performed on the liquid crystal display device 10]
FIG. 57 shows an example of a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 10. In FIG. 57, the liquid crystal display device 10 is divided into three regions, a first display region 101, a second display region 102, and a display window 4, for the sake of simplicity, but in the actual pachi-slot 1, each of them is divided into three regions. Areas are mixed and formed integrally.

  The first display area 101 is an area where main effects are performed. In the example shown in FIG. 57, a display example during the battle ART is shown. During the battle ART, as shown in FIG. 57, an ally character and an enemy character compete with each other, and each attack / defense reduces their physical strength (HP) to produce a win / loss effect. .. The display window 4 is as described above, and displays a part of the symbols drawn on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  In the second display area 102, an apocalypse 103 that affects various lotteries and the like performed on the sub (sub control circuit 42) side is displayed. The apocalypse 103 is provided with five areas 103A, 103B, 103C, 103D, and 103E in which effect balls described later are set. In the area 103A, effect balls that affect various lottery in this game are set, in the area 103B, effect balls that affect various lottery in the next game are set, and in the area 103C, two game destinations are set. In the game, effect balls that influence various lottery are set, in the area 103D, effect balls that affect various lottery in the game of three game destinations are set, and in the area 103E, various lottery in the game of four game destinations. A production ball that influences is set. That is, in the apocalypse 103, effect balls that influence various lottery in the game for five times including the current game are set. As for the effect ball set in the apocalypse 103, the set area is updated as the game progresses. When the apocalypse 103 is activated, some effect balls (including blank (empty)) are set, and when the apocalypse 103 is not in operation, no effect balls are set.

  Specifically, in the normal game state and the high-probability game state, the apocalypse 103 may operate or may not operate, and is activated by winning an operation lottery described later. When the apocalypse 103 operates in the normal game state and the high-probability game state, one of the lottery balls 1, lottery balls 2, lottery balls 3, lottery balls 4, and confirmed balls is displayed in the regions 103A to 103E as shown in FIG. The production ball of is set. In the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, the lottery balls 1 to confirmed balls set in the apocalypse 103 affect the above-mentioned transition lottery (A) (D). More specifically, the lottery balls 1 to confirmed balls set in the area 103A affect the above-mentioned transition lottery (A) (D) in the game this time.

  The transfer lottery (A) and (D) described above is performed at two timings, one when the reel starts to rotate and the other when the reel stops during one game. Of these, for the transfer lottery (A) and (D) performed at the time of starting reel rotation (at the time of start), the lottery balls 1 to confirmed balls set in the area 103A become the lottery result regardless of the internal winning combination. Affect against. On the other hand, with respect to the transfer lottery (A) (D) performed when the reels are stopped, the lottery balls 1 to confirmed balls set in the area 103A have a combination of symbols displayed when the reels are stopped with "bell winning" or more. Affects the lottery result only in certain cases. It should be noted that the "bell prize" means that the combination of the symbols at the time of the correct press order is displayed on the push bell, or the combination of the symbols according to the common bell is displayed, and the "bell prize" or more. Is a "bell prize" or a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the rare roles such as chanrip, strong cherry, weak cherry, final combination, watermelon, and pure out (see FIG. 56). Is.

  The lottery balls 1 to finalized balls have different effects on the transfer lottery (A) and (D). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57, the lottery ball 1 has a low winning probability of CZ or more (CZ or ART), the lottery ball 2 has a medium winning probability of CZ or more, and the lottery ball 3 has The winning probability of CZ or higher has a high probability, the winning of lottery balls 4 is CZ or more, and the winning of the confirmed balls is the ART winning.

  Subsequently, in CZ, the apocalypse 103 is always active. In the areas 103A to 103E of the apocalypse 103 in the CZ, as shown in FIG. 57, one of the development balls and the avoidance balls is set, or a blank (empty) state in which no production balls are set is set. The development ball and the avoidance ball set in the apocalypse 103 in the CZ influence the lottery (C) for the transition to the above-described ART performed in the CZ. More specifically, the development balls and the avoidance balls set in the area 103A have an influence on the above-mentioned transfer lottery (C) to ART in the game this time.

  Specifically, when the development ball is set in the area 103A and the push-order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the above-described transfer lottery (C) to ART is performed. Then, when the stop operation is performed in this game, if the stop operation is a correct stop operation in the pushing order defined for the winning push-order bell, the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) Becomes "invalid". On the other hand, when this stop operation is an incorrect stop operation in the pressing order determined for the winning push order bell, the lottery result of the transfer lottery (C) is “maintain”. As described above, the CZ is a complete run type CZ, and the CZ ends when the transfer lottery (C) performed in the middle stage before the complete run is “maintained”. Therefore, in the game in which the expansion balls are set in the area 103A, the player desires that the push order bell is not determined as the internal winning combination (the transition lottery (C) itself is not performed), and the push order is temporarily determined. When the bell is determined as the internal winning combination, it is desired that the answer is correct in the order of pressing (the transfer lottery (C) becomes invalid).

  On the other hand, the avoidance ball and the blank (empty) are effect balls that do not perform the above-described transfer lottery (C) to the ART even if the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination. From the player's point of view, in the game in which the avoidance ball and the blank (empty) are set, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  Subsequently, in the adversary ART, the apocalypse 103 always operates. As shown in FIG. 57, any one of boss balls 1 to boss balls 8 and friend balls is set in the areas 103A to 103E of the apocalypse 103 in the enemy determination ART. The boss ball 1 to the boss ball 8 and the ally ball set in the apocalypse 103 in the enemy decision ART influence the lottery of the enemy decision performed during the enemy decision ART. More specifically, the boss balls 1 to 8 and the ally balls set in the area 103A affect the lottery for determining the enemy in the current game.

  Specifically, when any of Boss ball 1 to Boss ball 8 is set in the area 103A, when the pushing order bell (which may include the common bell) is determined as the internal winning combination, the set The boss corresponding to the type of the boss ball being played is determined as the opponent in the battle ART. The bosses corresponding to the boss balls 1 to 8 are enemy characters having different characteristics, which will be described later in detail. On the other hand, when any of Boss ball 1 to Boss ball 8 is set in the area 103A, if an internal winning combination other than the pushing order bell is determined, the enemy character of the opponent is not determined and the enemy is determined. ART will continue. In addition, when any of Boss ball 1 to Boss ball 8 is set in the area 103A, any one of pure outfall, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, or chanrip (so-called rare role) is determined as an internal winning combination. Then, the opponent is not determined and the lottery of the allied balls is performed. In the situation where the lottery is won and ally balls are stocked, the boss balls 1 to 8 set in the apocalypse are rewritten as ally balls.

  When the teammate ball is set in the area 103A during the enemy determination ART, lottery is performed to increase the physical strength (HP) of the teammate character based on the internal winning combination. If this lottery is won, the stamina of the teammate character increases, so that the expectation that the teammate character wins in the subsequent battle ART is increased.

  Subsequently, in the battle ART, the apocalypse 103 always operates. In the battle ART, in the areas 103A to 103E of the apocalypse 103, as shown in FIG. 57, a production ball of any one of a ally ball, an enemy ball, and an awakening ball is set. The ally ball, the enemy ball, and the awakening ball set in the apocalypse 103 in the battle ART affect the result of the battle performed during the battle ART. More specifically, the ally ball, the enemy ball, and the awakening ball set in the area 103A affect the competition in the game this time or thereafter.

  Specifically, when the pressing order bell or the common bell is determined as the internal winning combination when the team ball or the enemy ball is set in the area 103A, the character corresponding to the type of the set effect ball is set. Attack an opponent in the game. For example, when the teammate ball is set, the teammate character attacks the enemy character, and as a result, the physical strength (HP) of the enemy character decreases. On the other hand, when the enemy ball is set, the enemy character attacks the ally character, and as a result, the physical strength (HP) of the ally character decreases.

  On the other hand, when an ally ball or an enemy ball is set in the area 103A, if one of the pure outfall, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, or chanlip (so-called rare role) is determined as the internal winning combination, The teammate character mounts an attack on the enemy character regardless of the type of effect ball that is set. In this case, the physical strength (HP) of the enemy character is basically reduced more than when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination.

  Further, when the awakening ball is set in the area 103A, if the push order bell, common bell, pure out, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, or chanrip is determined as the internal winning combination, the ally character is determined. While attacking the enemy character, allied balls are stocked. Then, when the ally ball is stocked, the enemy ball set in the apocalypse is rewritten as the ally ball by the stocked amount. As a result, the number of situations in which the teammate character makes an attack thereafter increases, and as a result, the degree of expectation that the teammate character wins in the battle ART increases.

[ART and CZ lottery during normal gaming state and high probability gaming state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58 to FIG. 72, the details of the transfer lottery (A) (D) to ART and CZ performed during the normal game state and the high-probability game state will be described. FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram of the transfer lottery (A) (D) performed during the normal game state and the high-probability game state, and FIGS. 59 to 72 are referred to during the transfer lottery (A) (D). Are various data tables. The various data tables shown in FIGS. 59 to 72 are stored in the sub ROM 82.

<Overview of transfer lottery (A) (D)>
Referring to FIG. 58, in the normal game state and the high-probability game state, when the start operation is performed and the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started, the internal winning combination is determined according to the control of the main control circuit 41. .. In the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, when the internal winning combination is determined, first, the ART / CZ transition lottery (A) (D) at the start is performed. In this start transition lottery (A) (D), basically, the winning probability of ART or CZ is different depending on the gaming state, and the winning probability of ART or CZ is higher in the high-probability gaming state than in the normal gaming state. The probability is high. In addition, in the transition lottery (A) (D) at the time of start, as will be described later, not only the game state, but also the internal winning combination and the effect ball (lottery ball 1-confirmed ball) set in the area 103A Or, the winning probability of CZ is different.

  Further, in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, when the internal winning combination is determined, the apocalypse lottery is performed to determine whether or not to activate the apocalypse. The winning probability of the apocalypse lottery differs depending on the winning mode of the apocalypse operation. Specifically, there are low mode, high mode and intensive mode (there are also states of short, middle and long, respectively) in the winning mode of the apocalypse operation. Mode and High mode do not win to activate the apocalypse. In the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, the winning mode of the apocalypse operation is shifted based on the internal winning combination, and the apocalypse is activated when it is possible to upgrade to the concentrated mode.

  After that, when the stop operation is performed and the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, the transfer lottery (A) (D) of ART and CZ at the time of reel stop is performed depending on whether or not the apocalypse is activated. Specifically, when the apocalypse is operating, based on the combination of the effect ball (lottery ball 1-confirmed ball) and the “bell winning” or more set in the area 103A, the ART and CZ are selected. The transfer lottery (A) and (D) are performed. In the transfer lottery (A) (D) when the reels are stopped, the winning probability of ART or CZ is different depending on the effect balls set in the area 103A.

<Various data tables referred to in the transfer lottery (A) (D)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 59 to FIG. 72, the transfer lottery (A) (D) to ART and CZ performed in the normal game state and the high-probability game state will be specifically described.

<Starting ART lottery table>
59 to 61 are diagrams showing the start-time ART lottery table referred to in the transition lottery (A) (D) at the start in the normal game state and the high-probability game state. The start-time ART lottery table defines the lottery value information for the lottery result for each of the current game state, the effect balls set in the area 103A, and the internal winning combination.

  In the present embodiment, on the sub (sub-control circuit 42) side, the random numbers for effect extracted from the predetermined numerical value range “0 to 32767” are sequentially subtracted by the lottery value according to each lottery result, The lottery is performed by determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative (whether a so-called “carry” has occurred).

  Referring to the start-time ART lottery tables shown in FIGS. 59 to 60, the probability of winning the CZ or ART is different according to the effect balls set in the area 103A during the normal game state, and the internal winning combination is also achieved. It can be seen that the probability of winning the CZ or ART varies depending on the situation. Further, comparing the start ART lottery table shown in FIGS. 59 to 60 with the start ART lottery table shown in FIG. 61, in the high-probability game state, it is possible to win the ART with a higher probability than in the normal game state. I understand. Similarly, referring to the start-time ART lottery table shown in FIG. 61, in the high-probability game state, it is understood that although the CZ is not won, the probability of winning the ART is high.

<Mode change lottery table>
62 to 66 are mode transition lottery tables referred to in the transition lottery of the winning mode of the apocalypse operation in the normal game state and the high probability game state. The mode transition lottery table defines whether or not the apocalypse is currently operating, the current winning mode of the apocalypse operation, and the information of the lottery value for the winning mode of the transition destination for each internal winning combination. Whether or not the apocalypse is currently operating is determined by the apocalypse flag. When the apocalypse flag is "0", it means that the apocalypse is not operating, and when the apocalypse flag is "1", the apocalypse is operating. Means inside.

  As described above, the winning modes of the apocalypse operation include the low mode, the high mode and the intensive mode, and the respective modes are provided with the states such as short, middle and long. The low mode, the high mode, and the intensive mode are the winning modes in which the expectation of the winning of the apocalypse lottery differs depending on whether or not the apocalypse is activated as described above. The short, middle, and long are states that define whether it is easy to shift to the more advantageous winning mode or the more unfavorable winning mode. Specifically, a short is a state in which it is most difficult to shift to a more advantageous winning mode, and a state in which it is most likely to shift to a more unfavorable winning mode, and a middle is difficult to shift to a more advantageous winning mode next. The state is the state in which it is easy to shift to the more unfavorable winning mode next, and the long is the state in which it is most likely to shift to the more advantageous winning mode and the most difficult to shift to the more unfavorable winning mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, when the apocalypse is inactive (Apocalypse flag 0), the winning mode basically goes up to the low mode, the high mode and the intensive mode in order, and then goes up to the intensive mode. And, it won't go down to low and high modes until the apocalypse works.

<Apocalypse activated lottery table>
FIG. 67 is an apocalypse actuation lottery table referred to in the apocalypse lottery during the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state. The apocalypse operation lottery table defines whether or not the apocalypse is currently active, the current winning mode of the apocalypse operation, and lottery value information regarding the operation of the apocalypse for each internal winning combination. Here, the operation of the apocalypse is performed over the guaranteed number of games to be added and subtracted as a result of the apocalypse lottery. Specifically, as a result of the apocalypse lottery, the guaranteed number of times is added by the number corresponding to the case where “Apocalypse active_guaranteed 1 addition” to “Apocalypse active_guaranteed 5 addition” is won, and “Apocalypse active_guaranteed” If "subtract" is won, the guaranteed count is decremented by 1. When the guaranteed number of times becomes 0 as a result of the addition / subtraction, the apocalypse operation ends (the apocalypse flag changes from 1 to 0). If the guaranteed number of times is increased by 1 or more when the apocalypse flag is 0, the apocalypse flag is updated from 0 to 1 and the apocalypse operates.

  Further, in the apocalypse actuation lottery table, “no apocalypse actuation” means non-winning of the apocalypse lottery, and the apocalypse flag is maintained at 0. Similarly, “maintaining apocalypse_maintaining” means maintaining the apocalypse operation without adding or subtracting the guaranteed number of times, and the apocalypse flag is maintained at 1.

  Referring to the apocalypse operation lottery table in FIGS. 67 (A) and 67 (B), when the apocalypse is not currently active, the apocalypse operation may start only when the winning mode is the intensive mode. I understand. Therefore, the pachi-slot 1 may perform an effect that suggests the current winning mode. For example, the current winning mode can be suggested by moving the movable accessory 22. Specifically, the probability of moving the movable accessory 22 is changed according to the winning mode. For example, in a situation where the player stays in the concentrated mode, the probability of moving the movable accessory 22 is increased to a high mode or a low mode. In a situation where the user is staying, it is possible to reduce the probability of moving the movable accessory 22. Similarly, in the apocalypse lottery, an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the apocalypse will be activated (the guaranteed number of times is added) may be performed. In particular, the effect of suggesting the degree of expectation may be performed by something different from the movable accessory 22.

<Apocalypse MAP lottery table>
68 and 69 are apocalypse MAP lottery tables for randomizing the apocalypse MAP for determining the effect balls to be set in the apocalypse in operation in the normal game state and the high-probability game state. In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, basically, the larger the MAP number is, the more advantageous it is to the player. This point is not limited to the apocalypse MAP, and the same applies to other MAPs described later. The apocalypse MAP lottery table of FIG. 68 is a table referred to when the apocalypse flag is activated (the apocalypse flag is updated from 0 to 1). The apocalypse MAP lottery table of FIG. 69 is a table referred to when the MAP data defined for each apocalypse MAP is 0.

  The apocalypse MAP lottery table defines lottery value information for each of the current apocalypse MAPs and the transfer destination apocalypse MAPs. In addition, at the initial stage when the power is turned on, “MAP0” is set as the apocalypse MAP.

<MAP data correspondence table>
The apocalypse MAP defines MAP data for determining the effect balls to be set in the apocalypse during operation. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of MAP data defined in each apocalypse MAP. As shown in FIG. 70, in the apocalypse map MAP1, MAP data "1" is defined in the first game, and MAP data "0" is defined in the second game. When the MAP data “0” is specified, a new apocalypse MAP is randomly selected by referring to the apocalypse MAP random determination table shown in FIG.

<Demonstration ball lottery table during apocalypse operation>
FIG. 71 is an apocalypse operating effect ball lottery table for determining effect balls to be set in the apocalypse in operation in the normal game state and the high probability game state. The apocalypse act time production ball lottery table defines lottery value information about the production balls to be set for each MAP data. As shown in FIG. 71, the larger the MAP data, the more effective the effect ball is set for the player. In addition, in FIG. 71, the fixed balls are not randomly selected. Although a description of this point is omitted, for example, by performing lottery to upgrade the effect balls set when the rare role is won, it is possible to upgrade the lottery balls 1 to 4 to the confirmed balls. Good.

  Further, in FIG. 71, lottery value information for the effect balls is also defined for the MAP data “0”. As described above, when the MAP data is “0”, a new apocalypse MAP is randomly selected. Here, either the lottery for the new apocalypse MAP or the lottery for the effect balls based on the MAP data “0” may be prioritized. In this regard, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, if the lottery apocalypse MAP is not used to randomly draw the production balls, the lottery apocalypse is given priority to the lottery of the production balls based on the MAP data “0”. If the lottery of the production balls is performed even once in the MAP, the lottery of the new apocalypse MAP will be prioritized. For example, in the case of the apocalypse MAP “0”, since all the MAP data in the five games is “0” (see FIG. 70), lottery of the effect balls is performed once based on the MAP data “0”, and then a new lot The apocalypse MAP is randomly selected. On the other hand, in the case of the apocalypse MAP “1”, the MAP data of the first game is “1” and the MAP data of the second game is “0” (see FIG. 70), so the effect based on the MAP data “0” Without a lottery of balls, a new apocalypse MAP is randomly drawn after lottery of effect balls based on MAP data “1”.

  The same applies to other MAPs described later. Specifically, the MAP data “0” is randomly determined based on the MAP data “0” only in the first game, and the lottery is not performed based on the MAP data “0” in the second game. , Lottery a new MAP. In the case of performing such control, the lottery based on the MAP data “0” is not performed in the MAP having the MAP number “1” or more.

<Flow of production ball set to apocalypse>
Here, the flow of setting the effect ball in the apocalypse will be specifically described. When the apocalypse lottery is won and the apocalypse flag is updated from 0 to 1, the apocalypse is activated. In accordance with the operation of the apocalypse, the sub-control circuit 42 determines a predetermined number of effect balls and sets them in the apocalypse. As shown in FIG. 57, the apocalypse has five areas for setting effect balls. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 determines five effect balls and sets them in the apocalypse. ..

  When the apocalypse lottery is won and the apocalypse flag is updated from 0 to 1, the apocalypse MAP is randomly selected by the apocalypse MAP lottery table shown in FIG. Here, it is assumed that the current apocalypse map is “3”. Referring to the apocalypse MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 68, for example, the apocalypse MAP “4” is randomly selected from the current apocalypse MAP “3”. In this apocalypse MAP “4”, as shown in FIG. 70, “1” is defined as the MAP data of the first game, and “0” is defined as the MAP data of the second game. Therefore, the sub control circuit 42 randomly draws the first effect ball based on the MAP data “1” of the first game. As a result, referring to the apocalypse act time production ball lottery table shown in FIG. 71, “lottery ball 1” is determined as the first production ball.

  Subsequently, the sub control circuit 42 refers to the MAP data of the second game of the apocalypse MAP “4”. As shown in FIG. 70, since the MAP data of the second game is “0”, the sub-control circuit 42 randomly draws a new apocalypse MAP without randomly drawing the effect balls. Specifically, the apocalypse MAP of the transfer destination is randomly selected from the current apocalypse MAP “4” by referring to the apocalypse MAP random determination table referenced at the time of the MAP data “0” shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 69, the apocalypse MAP “5” is randomly selected as the migration destination apocalypse MAP. In this apocalypse MAP “5”, as shown in FIG. 70, “2” is defined as the MAP data of the first game, and “0” is defined as the MAP data of the second game. Therefore, the sub control circuit 42 randomly draws the second effect ball based on the MAP data “2” of the first game. As a result, referring to the apocalypse actuation effect lottery table shown in FIG. 71, for example, “lottery ball 3” is determined as the second effect ball.

  Subsequently, the sub-control circuit 42 refers to the MAP data of the second game of the apocalypse MAP “5”. As shown in FIG. 70, since the MAP data of the second game is “0”, the sub-control circuit 42 randomly draws a new apocalypse MAP without randomly drawing the effect balls. Specifically, the apocalypse MAP of the transfer destination is randomly selected from the current apocalypse MAP “5” by referring to the apocalypse MAP random determination table shown at the time of the MAP data “0” shown in FIG. Referring to FIG. 69, as the transfer destination apocalypse MAP, for example, the apocalypse MAP “1” is randomly selected. In this apocalypse MAP “1”, as shown in FIG. 70, “1” is defined as the MAP data of the first game, and “0” is defined as the MAP data of the second game. Therefore, the sub control circuit 42 randomly draws the third effect ball based on the MAP data “1” of the first game. As a result, referring to the apocalypse actuation effect lottery table shown in FIG. 71, for example, “lottery ball 1” is determined as the third effect ball.

  Similarly, when five effect balls are repeatedly determined, the sub control circuit 42 ends the lottery of effect balls and sequentially sets the determined effect balls in the apocalypse. Although the order of setting the determined effect balls in the apocalypse is arbitrary, for example, the sub-control circuit 42 sets the effect balls determined in the first order in the areas 103A, 103B, 103C, 103D, and 103E. ..

  After that, when the game progresses to the next game, the effect balls set in the areas 103A to 103E slide one by one, and the area 103E becomes blank (empty). In this case, when the apocalypse flag is "1" also in the game (when the guaranteed number of times remains), lottery of effect balls is performed again, and new effect balls are set in the area 103E. On the other hand, when the apocalypse flag is “0” in the game (when the guaranteed number of times as a result of the previous game does not remain), the apocalypse operation has already ended, and therefore lottery of effect balls is not performed.

<ART lottery table when reel is stopped>
FIG. 72 is a view showing the reel lot stop ART lottery table referred to in the transition lottery (A) (D) at reel stop during the normal game state and the high probability game state. The reel lot stop ART lottery table defines the lottery value information for the lottery result for each effect ball set in the area 103A. Here, as described above, when the reels are stopped in the transition lottery (A) (D), the effect balls set in the area 103A have the combination of symbols displayed when the reels are stopped being “bell winning” or more. Only affects the lottery result. Therefore, the reel stop ART lottery table shown in FIG. 72 is a table that is referred to only when the effect balls are set in the area 103A and the symbol combination displayed when the reel is stopped is “bell winning” or more. is there.

  When referring to the ART lottery table during reel stop shown in FIG. 72, the probability of winning the CZ or ART is different depending on the effect balls set in the area 103A. In particular, in the lottery balls 4 and the confirmed balls, the CZ or ART is You can see that you will definitely win.

[Game during high probability game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73 and FIG. 74, the flow of the game other than the transition lottery (D) during the high-probability game state will be described. As described above, the high-probability gaming state corresponds to the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state on the main side, and when the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state on the main side shifts to the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, it becomes high. The probability game state also ends, and the game state shifts to the normal game state. The case where the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state on the main side shifts to the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state is an incorrect answer to the push order bell or the push order lip as described above. Here, if the high-probability gaming state ends immediately and shifts to the normal gaming state even though the normal gaming state can be shifted to the high-probability gaming state, the interest is lost. Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in the high-probability game state, the correct pressing order is notified to the pressing order bell and the pressing order lip only for a predetermined number of times.

  73 is a schematic diagram of the flow of the game during the high-probability game state, and FIG. 74 is a data table referred to during the high-probability game state. The data table shown in FIG. 74 is stored in the sub ROM 82.

<Outline of game flow during high-probability game state>
Referring to FIG. 73, when a combination of symbols relating to the RT4 transition lip is displayed during the non-win in the ART transition lottery in the normal game state, the main side shifts to the RT4 game state in the bonus non-winning state. At this point, the gaming state on the sub side is the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state). In this normal game state (RT4 game state), when the start operation is performed and the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started, the internal winning combination is determined according to the control of the main control circuit 41. In the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state), when the internal winning combination is determined, the avoidance points are randomly determined based on the determined internal winning combination. When the avoidance point is obtained in this lottery, the sub control circuit 42 shifts the game state from the normal game state to the high-probability game state for the first time. The lottery (B) for shifting to the high-probability game state described above in FIG. 55 corresponds to the lottery for this avoidance point.

  In the high-probability game state, the situation where the main side shifts to the RT1 game state of the bonus non-winning state is avoided based on the obtained avoidance points. Specifically, in the high-probability game state, when the start operation is performed and the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started, the internal winning combination is determined according to the control of the main control circuit 41. The sub-control circuit 42 determines whether or not there is a possibility of shifting to the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state based on the internal winning combination. More specifically, when the internal winning combination is the push order bell or the push order lip, the sub control circuit 42 determines that there is a possibility of shifting to the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state.

  When there is a possibility of shifting to the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, the sub control circuit 42 determines that the push order bell or the push order lip determined as the internal winning combination is correct only when the avoidance points remain. It informs the pushing order. By receiving this notification, the player can perform the stop operation in the order of pressing the correct answer, and the high-probability game state ends (that is, the RT1 game state of the bonus non-winning state ends up shifting. Can be avoided. If there is no avoidance point, the player himself / herself selects the pushing order that is the correct answer.

After that, when the stop operation is performed and the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, the game state is shifted on the main side based on the combination of the symbols displayed. Specifically, when the bell spill or the RT1 transition lip is displayed, the state shifts to the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, otherwise, the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state is maintained. .. On the sub side, the sub control circuit 42 ends the high-probability game state and starts the normal game state from the next game when the game state of the main side shifts to the RT1 game state of the bonus non-winning state. On the other hand, the sub control circuit 42 maintains the high-probability game state when the main game state maintains the RT4 game state of the bonus non-winning state, and sets the next game to the high-probability game state.
The above flow is the flow of the game during the high probability game state.

<Avoidance point lottery table>
FIG. 74 is an avoidance point lottery table that is referred to in the normal game state (RT4 game state). The avoidance point lottery table defines the number of replays determined as the internal winning combination during the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state), and the lottery value information for the avoidance points to be added for each internal winning combination in the current game. .. As shown in FIG. 74, in the normal game state (RT4 game state), different avoidance point lottery tables are referred to based on the number of times replay is determined as the internal winning combination. In FIG. 74, the number of times the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is “0 times” and “one or more times”, but the table is different, but the number of times the table is changed is not limited to this. ..

  Referring to the avoidance point lottery table shown in FIG. 74, if the replay is determined as the internal winning combination at least once in the normal game state (RT4 game state), the probability that the avoidance points are given increases, and particularly the replay is 1 In the replay that is determined as the internal winning combination after being determined as the internal winning combination more than once, the avoidance points are easily given. Note that, as described above, in the RT4 game state, the probability of the combination relating to replay being determined as an internal winning combination is high. Therefore, when the normal game state (RT4 game state) continues for several games, avoidance points are given. Will be.

[Game during CZ]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 to 80, the flow of the game during CZ will be described. FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram of the flow of the game during CZ, and FIGS. 76 to 81 are data tables referred to during CZ. The data tables shown in FIGS. 75 to 80 are stored in the sub ROM 82.

<Outline of game flow during CZ>
As described above, in the transition lottery (A) (D) in the normal game state or the high-probability game state, if the CZ is won, the game state shifts to CZ. As shown in FIG. 75, in the first game after the CZ transition, when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R start to rotate in accordance with the start operation, the CZ_MAP lottery is performed. The CZ is a complete-run type chance zone in which a maximum of 30 games continue, while it ends when the lottery (C) for transition to ART performed in the middle is “maintained”. As for the transfer lottery (C) to the ART performed in the middle of the CZ, the winning probability of the ART increases as the CZ continues. CZ_MAP is used to set the number of games in which the winning probability of ART is increased in the transition lottery (C) to ART performed in the middle of CZ.

  When CZ_MAP is randomly selected in the first game after the transition to CZ, the ineffective points are subsequently randomly selected. The lottery for the invalid points includes lottery with an initial value performed in the first game after the CZ transition and additional lottery performed in each game during CZ. The invalid point is information that determines the number of times that the transfer lottery (C) to the ART performed in the middle of CZ is made “invalid”.

  Next, lottery of the production balls set in the apocalypse is performed. After that, in the games other than the 30th game of CZ, it is determined whether or not the developed ball is set in the current game, that is, whether or not the developed ball is set in the area 103A. If the development ball is set in this game, the transfer lottery (C) to the ART in the middle of CZ may be performed, and if the development ball is not set, basically it is concerned. The transfer lottery (C) is not performed. Specifically, when the development ball is set, the ineffective point is 0, and the pushing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the lottery (C) for shifting to ART in the middle of CZ is performed. In addition, the transfer lottery during the CZ has a different winning probability of the ART depending on the CZ mode, and if the CZ mode is 1 or more, the ART is always won. The CZ_MAP described above is a MAP that sets the number of games in which the CZ mode increases from 0 to 1 (see FIG. 77).

  Here, if the development ball is set in this game and the invalid point is 1 or more, or if the avoidance ball is set in this game, an effect suggesting the current CZ mode is performed. May be Specifically, since the number of games in which the CZ mode increases from 0 to 1 is set in CZ_MAP, the current CZ mode is 1 and the number of games in the CZ mode changes from 0 to 1 Whether to go up can be specified from CZ_MAP. When the current CZ mode is 1, or when the CZ mode is increased from 0 to 1 in a game within a few times (for example, a few times), the sub control circuit 42 is compared with other cases. By performing a different mode of effect, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests the current CZ mode.

  As shown in FIG. 75, in the game of the 30th game of CZ, a lottery (C) for shifting to ART is performed. In this case, the transfer lottery (C) to the ART based on the CZ mode 2 is performed without fail, and the ART is won as if the player has completed the chance zone. When the CZ is completed as described above, the more advantageous ART game state is entered.

  During the CZ, when the lottery (C) for shifting to ART accompanying the development ball is performed at the time of start, the following processing is performed. Specifically, after that, when the stop operation is performed and the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols is “bell winning” or more, that is, the pressing order is the correct answer in the pressing order of the bell. Judge whether or not. If the correct answer is given to the pushing order of the pushing order bell, the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) due to the development ball is invalidated regardless of whether or not the winning is given to the ART, and the CZ continues. become. On the other hand, in the case of an incorrect answer in the pushing order of the pushing order bell, the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) associated with the development ball is maintained, and thereafter, the game state is shifted to the lottery result.

  As described above, in the CZ, the more the CZ continues, the higher the probability of winning the transfer lottery (C) to the ART increases. In addition, when the CZ is completed, the player always wins the transfer lottery (C) to the ART, and As the CZ continues for a long time, the situation becomes more advantageous to the player because the advantageous ART game state is entered. Therefore, the player will play the game so that the CZ continues. Here, the end condition of CZ is that the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) to ART is maintained, so that the player does not set the development ball in the apocalypse and the development ball in the apocalypse. In the game that is set, the push order bell is not determined as the internal winning combination, and in the game where the development ball is set in the apocalypse, if the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, The game will be played so that the correct answer is given in the order of pressing.

<CZ_MAP lottery table>
FIG. 76 is a CZ_MAP lottery table referred to in the first game after the CZ transition. The CZ_MAP lottery table defines information on lottery values for the types of CZ_MAP. After shifting to CZ, the sub control circuit 42 refers to the CZ_MAP lottery table and randomly determines the CZ_MAP used in the CZ.

<CZ_MAP correspondence table>
FIG. 77 is a CZ_MAP correspondence table showing the contents of CZ_MAP that is randomly selected by the CZ_MAP random determination table. In each of CZ_MAP, a CZ mode is set for each continuous game number in the CZ. The CZ mode is information for setting the winning probability of the ART in the transition lottery (C) to the ART during the CZ as described above, and the higher the numerical value of the CZ mode is, the higher the winning probability of the ART is set. ing. As shown in FIG. 77, each of CZ_MAP is set so that the CZ mode goes up each time the number of continuous games in the CZ increases, and does not go down once the CZ mode goes up. That is, the respective CZ_MAPs are set so that the number of games that go from CZ mode 0 to CZ mode 1 is different. Further, in all CZ_MAPs, the CZ mode is set to 2 when the number of continuous games is 30.

  In the present embodiment, only three types of CZ modes, CZ modes 0, 1 and 2, are provided. However, in the present invention, the CZ mode increases every time the number of continuous games in the CZ increases, and the CZ mode once increases. The CZ mode is not limited to three types as long as it is set so that the mode does not fall when it goes up.

<Invalid point lottery table>
FIG. 78 is an invalid point lottery table. The ineffective point lottery table is for extracting the ineffective points for invalidating the transition lottery (C) to the ART performed when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which the development balls in the CZ are set. Used for. When the invalid point is 1 or more, the transition lottery (C) to the ART performed when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which the development ball is set is invalidated. When the number of invalid points is 1 or more, the transfer lottery (C) may be performed once and then invalidated, or the transfer lottery (C) may not be performed in the first place.

  As described above, the lottery of invalid points includes the lottery of the initial value performed in the first game after the CZ transition and the additional lottery performed in each game during the CZ. FIG. 78 (A) is an invalid point lottery table used for random determination of initial values, and defines lottery value information for invalid points determined as initial values. Further, (B) and (C) of FIG. 78 are invalid point lottery tables used for additional lottery, and lottery for invalid points to be added for each type of effect ball and internal winning combination set in this game. Specifies value information.

<Direction lottery table>
FIG. 79 is an effect ball lottery table used when lottery effect balls to be set in the apocalypse during CZ. The lottery value information for the effect balls to be set is defined for each final effect ball being set. The final effect ball in the set is, for example, the effect ball set in the area 103E farthest from the current game. Referring to FIG. 79, when the final effect ball in the set is an expanded ball, the expanded ball is not randomly selected. That is, during the CZ, two development balls are not set consecutively in the apocalypse areas 103A to 103E. On the other hand, when the final effect ball in the set is other (blank or avoidance ball), the developed ball is randomly selected with a predetermined probability.

  In CZ, either the development ball or the avoidance ball is set in the apocalypse, but as shown in the production ball lottery table, in the production ball lottery, only the development ball or the blank (empty) is randomly selected. Avoidance balls are not randomly selected. Here, the avoidance ball is set in the apocalypse by overwriting the set development ball when the invalid point is 1 or more and the development ball is set in the apocalypse. When the number of invalid points is 1 or more, the timing of rewriting the developed ball to the avoidance ball is arbitrary. For example, of the areas 103A to 103E, the development ball may not be rewritten to the avoidance ball until reaching the area 103B. Of course, the development ball may be rewritten to the avoidance ball at the time of the area 103E. Alternatively, the development ball may be maintained as it is at the time of the area 103A and the transition lottery (C) itself may be invalidated to avoid the end of CZ.

<ART lottery table in CZ>
FIG. 80 is a CZ-ART ART lottery table referred to in the transition lottery (C) to CZ ART. The CZ ART ART lottery table defines the information of the lottery value for the lottery result of the transition lottery (C), for each winning / no winning of the CZ mode and BB. By referring to the ART lottery table during CZ, it is understood that the probability of winning the ART is low when the CZ mode is 0 and the ART is always won when the CZ mode is 1 or more when the BB is not winning. In the CZ mode, the higher the numerical value of the winning probability of ART in the transfer lottery (C) or the degree of advantage of ART at the time of winning the ART, the more advantageous it is to the player. There is no need to set it to.

[Game during BB]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 to 86, the flow of the game in the bonus state (also referred to as “in BB”) will be described. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a part of the correspondence relationship between the types of winning combinations managed on the main (main control circuit 41) side and the abbreviations of winning combinations managed on the sub (sub-control circuit 42) side in BB. Yes, FIG. 82 is a schematic diagram of the flow of the game in BB, and FIGS. 83 to 86 are data tables referred to in BB. The data tables shown in FIGS. 83 to 86 are stored in the sub ROM 82.

<Correspondence between main side and sub side of winning combination>
FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a part of the correspondence relationship between the types of winning combinations managed on the main (main control circuit 41) side and the abbreviations of winning combinations managed on the sub (sub-control circuit 42) side in BB. is there. On the sub side, the winning combination on the main side is managed by the abbreviations shown in the correspondence table of FIG. 81. The correspondence relationship other than the winning combination shown in FIG. 81 is the same as that in FIG.

<Outline of game flow during BB>
As shown in FIG. 82, the game in BB is performed by the operation of BB. When the BB operation is performed, the BB mode is set to 0. Here, the BB mode is information for setting the winning probability of ART in the lottery (F) for shifting to ART performed during BB. The pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment has BB modes 0 to 5 as BB modes, and the larger the numerical value of the BB mode, the higher the winning probability of ART.

  Subsequently, when the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started during the BB in accordance with the start operation, the transfer lottery (F) to the ART performed at the start during the BB is performed. Regardless of the above-mentioned BB mode, the transition lottery (F) at the start is won in the ART when the abbreviation “7 sets of rep” on the sub side is determined as the internal winning combination, and in other cases. No winning for ART.

  Then, based on the internal winning combination in the BB, the mode up lottery of the BB mode is performed. In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, a winning combination that may be mode-up is defined for each current BB mode. Although details will be described later, in the pachi-slot 1, the higher the BB mode, the smaller the number of types of winning combinations that may be mode-up.

  After that, when the medals are paid out according to the stop operation, it is determined whether or not the operation of the BB is ended. In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the BB ends when more than 59 medals are paid out in the BB. If more than 59 medals have not yet been paid out, the operation of the BB continues. On the other hand, when more than 59 medals have been paid out, a lottery (F) for shifting to ART at the end of BB is performed. The transition lottery (F) at the end is a lottery performed according to the BB mode, and the larger the numerical value of the BB mode, the higher the winning probability of ART.

<ART lottery table at BB start>
FIG. 83 is an ART lottery table during BB start, which is referred to in the transition lottery during start during BB (F). The BB start ART lottery table is referred to when the sub-side abbreviation “7 sets of rep” is determined, and defines the lottery value information for the transition lottery result to ART. As shown in FIG. 83, when the abbreviation “7 sets of rep” on the sub side is determined, the player always wins the ART in the transition lottery (F) at the start.

  Here, referring to the correspondence table of the winning combinations shown in FIG. 81, between the JAC2 flags (when JACIN2 is carried over as an internal winning combination) and between JAC3 flags (when JACIN3 is carried over as an internal winning combination), the main Only three "F_312 upper 7 sets" to "F_2nd cross 7 sets" on the side are "7 sets Lip". On the other hand, between the JAC1 flags (when JACIN1 is carried over as an internal winning combination), "F_J1 upper row 7 rep" to "F_J1 cross 7 row" to "F_2nd cross 7 row"-"F_J1 cross row 7" on the main side A total of 6 including "3 rep" are "7 rep." Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1, the probability of winning the ART in the transition lottery (F) at the start varies depending on the type of carryover combination carried over to the BB.

<BB mode up lottery table>
84 and 85 are BB mode up random determination tables referred to in the BB mode up random determination. The BB mode up lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the mode up lottery for each of the current BB mode and the internal winning combination.

  Referring to the BB middle mode up lottery table, when the current BB mode is 0, if any of the push order bell, common bell, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry or chanrip is determined as the internal winning combination, BB The mode will go up. In other words, there are six types of winning combinations that may be upgraded from BB mode 0. Similarly, there are five types of winning combinations that may be mode-up from BB mode 1, four types of winning combinations that may be mode-up from BB mode 2, and modes from BB mode 3 There are three types of winning combinations that may be up, and two types of winning combinations that may be mode-up from BB mode 4.

  In addition, a winning combination that may be mode-up from BB mode 4 is included in a winning combination that may be mode-up in BB mode 3, and similarly, a winning combination that may be mode-up from BB mode 3. Is included in a winning combination that may be up in BB mode 2, and a winning combination that may be up in BB mode 2 is included in a winning combination that may be up in BB mode 1. The winning combinations that may be mode-up from the BB mode 1 are included in the winning combinations that may be mode-up in the BB mode 0.

  As described above, in Pachi-slot 1, the higher the BB mode, the smaller the number of types of winning combinations that may be mode-up, and the higher the BB mode is, the more winning combinations are likely to be mode-up. , There is a possibility that the mode is up even if the BB mode is low.

  In the BB mode up lottery table illustrated in FIGS. 84 and 85, the BB mode is skipped one step at a time so that the mode can be increased (for example, BB mode 0 without passing through BB mode 1). It is possible to mode up to 2 or more). In this respect, the BB mode mode lottery table may be configured such that the BB mode is always mode-up only one step at a time. According to such a configuration, since the BB mode can go up only by one step, the expectation during staying in each BB mode is lowered, so that it is possible to skip the BB mode and increase the BB mode. Can be set to increase the expectation of rising. As a result, it becomes easy to go up to a certain BB mode in the BB, so it becomes easy to create a game mode in which the BB mode gradually goes up.

  Here, referring to the BB mode up lottery tables shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, if the internal winning combination is chanrip, the BB mode is likely to rise. Further, referring to the winning combination correspondence table shown in FIG. 81, among the JAC1 flags and the JAC3 flags, only five “F_J3 chance rep 1” to “F_J3 cherry rep” on the main side are “chanp”. On the other hand, between the JAC2 flags, a total of 10 items, which are five of "F_J3 chance lip 1" to "F_J3 cherry lip" on the main side, are added to the "F_J2 chance lip 1" to "F_J2 cherry lip". "It has become. Therefore, in Pachi-slot 1, the probability of raising the BB mode differs depending on the type of carryover combination carried over during BB, and as a result, the transition at the end of the BB depending on the type of carryover combination carried over during BB. The probability of winning the ART in the lottery (F) is different.

<ART lottery table at the end of BB>
FIG. 86 is a BB end ART lottery table referred to in the BB end transition lottery (F). The BB end ART lottery table defines the lottery value information for the transition lottery result to ART for each BB state and each BB mode. Note that the BB end ART lottery table of FIG. 86 (A) is referred to in the main side game state “bonus state RB game state” “bonus state RT4 game state”, and FIG. 86 (B) BB The ART lottery table at the end is referred to in the main side game state "bonus state RT0 game state""bonus state RT2 game state" (see FIG. 6).

[Game during ART]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 to 106, the flow of the game during the ART game state (also referred to as “during ART”) will be described. FIG. 87 is a schematic diagram of the flow of the game during the enemy determination ART, FIG. 88 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game during the battle ART, and FIGS. 89 to 106 are referred to during the ART. Data table. The data tables shown in FIGS. 88 to 106 are stored in the sub ROM 82.

<Outline of game flow during ART>
As shown in FIG. 87, if a lottery for transition to ART is won in a normal game state (normal game state, high-probability game state, CZ) or a bonus state, the sub-control circuit 42 determines whether the lottery has been won in the transition lottery. The ART status is randomly selected. The ART state is a state in which the degree of expectation for the continuation of the ART gaming state is different, and basically, the ART state having the larger numerical value is more likely to continue the ART (advantageous for the player). When the ART state is determined and the game state on the main side shifts to the RT4 game state of the bonus non-winning state, the enemy determination ART starts.

  When all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R start to rotate during the enemy decision ART due to the start operation, lottery of the effect balls to be set in the apocalypse is performed. In the enemy determination ART, effect balls such as boss balls 1 to 8 for deciding an enemy character to fight during the battle ART and a ally ball for increasing the HP of the ally character are set in the apocalypse. .. The ART state determined before the start of the enemy determination ART is referred to in the lottery of the effect balls, and as the ART state having a larger numerical value is set, the boss ball in which the ally character is more likely to win is set in the apocalypse.

  The lottery of the effect balls will be performed based on the boss MAP data defined in the boss MAP described later and the ART state. During the enemy determination ART, the boss MAP “1” is set first, and then the boss MAP having a larger value is set as the same enemy determination ART continues.

  If a boss ball is set in the apocalypse immediately after the enemy decision ART starts, there is a possibility that the enemy decision ART ends immediately after it starts. Therefore, at the time of starting the enemy determination ART, the guaranteed number of times that the effect balls are not set in the apocalypse may be set. By doing so, since the enemy determination ART continues for the minimum guaranteed number of times, it is possible to prevent the enemy determination ART from ending immediately after the start. The guaranteed number may be a predetermined fixed number (for example, 5 games), or may be determined by lottery at the time of starting the enemy determination ART. Also, if the guaranteed number of times is different between the enemy-deciding ART (so-called first hit) started when the lottery for winning the transition to the ART is won, and the enemy-deciding ART started when the ART game state continues. It may be done. Also in this case, the fixed guaranteed number of times may be different in both cases, and the random number of guaranteed number of times may be different in both cases. Further, when the ART game state continues, the guaranteed number of times may be changed according to the type of the enemy character who has fought in the continuing battle ART. Also in this case, the fixed guarantee count may be changed or the lottery probability of the guarantee count may be changed according to the type of the enemy character who has fought in the continuing battle ART.

  Then, the HP of the teammate character is determined. The HP of the teammate character determined here will be used in the following battle ART. The HP of the teammate character is determined based on the initial decision made in the first game of the enemy determination ART and the lottery for the later-described addition performed when the teammate ball is set in the apocalypse.

  The initial determination is different in control depending on whether or not the HP of the current ally character is less than the initial value (HP50). If the HP is less than the initial value, the sub control circuit 42 initializes the HP of the ally character. If the value is determined and is equal to or more than the initial value, the HP of the current ally character is maintained as it is. In Pachi-slot 1, when the teammate character wins the battle ART, the enemy determination ART is performed again. At this time, since the HP of the teammate character fluctuates in accordance with the result of the continuous ART (for example, HP increase due to the teammate ball (addition lottery) in the continuous ART enemy determination ART, or the continuous ART battle ART). In the middle enemy ball (HP reduction due to enemy attack) and the new enemy determination ART after continuing, the HP of the ally character is set according to the change from the initial value.

  Then, the sub-control circuit 42 performs control according to the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game. For example, when a boss ball is set, it is determined whether the push order bell (which may include the common bell) is determined as the internal winning combination, and the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination. If so, the boss according to the type of boss ball set in the apocalypse in this game is determined as the opponent in the battle ART.

  When the opponent of the battle ART is determined in this way, the HP of the enemy character to be the opponent is determined. The HP of the enemy character is determined based on the internal winning combination of the next game in which the opponent is determined. For example, when the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the HP of the enemy character is reduced. Is decided. When the opponent is decided in the enemy decision ART (push order bell win at the time of the boss ball) and the HP of the enemy character is decided (internal win part of the next game), the enemy decision ART ends and the next game starts. Battle ART will start.

  On the other hand, when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a teammate ball, the sub-control circuit 42 performs lottery on the HP of the teammate character. In this additional lottery, the HP of the teammate character is increased (added) based on the internal winning combination. Specifically, if a teammate ball is set in the apocalypse in the game this time, more than “bell winning” will be added to the lottery, and the HP of the teammate character will increase. "Bell winning" means that the push order bell or common bell is decided as the internal winning combination, and "bell winning" or higher means "bell winning", pure deviant, watermelon, weak cherry, strong. Either a rare role such as cherry or chanrip is decided as an internal winning combination.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the enemy determination ART is repeatedly performed until the opponent is determined. On the other hand, when the opponent is determined in the enemy determination ART and the HP of the enemy character is determined, the enemy determination ART ends, and the battle ART starts from the next game.

  As shown in FIG. 88, when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R start to rotate during the battle ART in accordance with the start operation, lottery of effect balls set in the apocalypse is performed. In the battle ART, effect balls such as a friend ball, an enemy ball, and an awakening ball for determining a character to attack are set in the apocalypse. As will be described later, parameters such as offensive power, defense power, and speed are set for each enemy character, and lottery of effect balls is performed according to the speed of the enemy character. Specifically, an enemy character having a faster speed has a higher probability of being randomly selected, and an enemy character having a slower speed has a higher probability of being randomly selected.

  Subsequently, during the battle ART, a battle between the teammate character and the enemy character is performed based on the internal winning combination and the effect ball set in the apocalypse. Specifically, when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a teammate ball or an awakening ball, the teammate character attacks the enemy character with "Bell winning" or higher, and the HP of the enemy character is HP. Is reduced. In addition, in this game, the production ball set in the apocalypse is an awakening ball, and in the case of "Bell winning" or more, the ally ball is stocked and the enemy ball set in the apocalypse is the stocked amount. It can be rewritten as a ally ball.

  On the other hand, when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an enemy ball, the enemy character attacks the ally character with "bell winning", the HP of the ally character decreases, and the "rare role" With “win”, the teammate character attacks the enemy character, and the HP of the enemy character decreases. The “rare winning combination” means that one of the rare winning combinations such as a pure win, a watermelon, a weak cherry, a strong cherry, and a chanlip is determined as an internal winning combination.

  Here, the HP reduction amount of the ally character when attacking the enemy character differs depending on the attack power set for the enemy character, and the enemy character having a higher attack power has a larger HP reduction amount of the ally character and thus has a higher attack power. The lower the enemy character, the smaller the HP reduction amount of the teammate character. Similarly, the amount of HP reduction of an enemy character when attacking a teammate character differs depending on the defense power set for the enemy character. The higher the defense power of the enemy character, the smaller the reduction amount of HP of the enemy character, and the more the defense power is. The lower the enemy character, the greater the amount of decrease in HP of the enemy character.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the battle ART ends when the HP of either the teammate character or the enemy character becomes 0 as a result of the battle. Specifically, when the HP of the teammate character becomes 0, the battle ART ends and the ART game state for one set ends. On the other hand, when the HP of the enemy character becomes 0, the battle ART ends with the number of sets in the ART gaming state unchanged. When the number of sets in the ART gaming state remains at the end of the battle ART, the ART gaming state continues, and the battle ART shifts to a new enemy determination ART.

<ART status lottery table>
FIG. 89 is an ART state lottery table that is referred to in order to lottery the ART state at the time of winning the transition to ART. The ART state lottery table defines the information of the lottery value for the ART state for each situation when the lottery for transition to ART is won. For example, if you win in the transition lottery (A) (D) performed in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, refer to the ART state lottery table in the “normal gaming state, high-probability gaming state” column. Then, the ART state is randomly selected. Similarly, in the case of winning in the transfer lottery (C) to the ART in the CZ, the ART state is randomly selected by referring to the ART state lottery table corresponding to the CZ mode in the CZ. In addition, when the winning in the lottery (F) for shifting to ART in the bonus state is won, the ART state is randomly selected by referring to the ART state lottery table in the “bonus state column”.

  Referring to FIG. 89, in the case where the transfer lottery is won in the CZ mode 2, the ART state having a larger numerical value is randomly selected than in the case where the transfer lottery is won in the CZ modes 0 and 1, and in other cases. Become. Here, the CZ mode 2 is the CZ mode when the player completes the CZ, and the ART state is in a state in which the larger the value, the more advantageous the ART is for the player (the state in which the ART is easy to continue). It is understood that when the player completes the race, not only the ART shift but also a more advantageous state for the player.

<Various data tables referenced during enemy decision ART>
Next, various data tables referred to during the enemy determination ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 96.

<Boss MAP lottery table>
FIG. 90 is a boss MAP lottery table for lottery of boss MAPs for determining effect balls to be set in the apocalypse in the enemy determination ART. During the enemy determination ART, the boss MAP “1” is set first, and then, when the boss MAP data specified for each boss MAP is 0, a new boss MAP is randomly selected. The boss MAP lottery table of FIG. 90 is a table that is referred to in order to randomly draw a new boss MAP when the boss MAP data is 0.

  By referring to the boss MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 90, it is understood that in the pachi-slot 1, the boss MAP having a large numerical value is easily drawn every time the boss MAP is randomly drawn. Specifically, the boss MAP “1” is likely to be randomly selected, and the boss MAP “3” is likely to be randomly selected as the boss MAP “3”. On the other hand, when the boss MAP “1” is randomly selected from the boss MAP “4”, the boss MAP “3” is likely to be randomly selected from the boss MAP “4”, so the value of the boss MAP is once reduced. However, since the boss MAP “3” is subsequently selected, the boss MAP “5” is randomly selected. As a result, each time the boss MAP is selected, the boss MAP having a large numerical value is randomly selected.

<Boss MAP data correspondence table>
In the boss MAP, boss MAP data for determining the effect ball to be set in the apocalypse is defined. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of boss MAP data defined in each boss MAP. As shown in FIG. 91, in the boss MAP1, boss MAP data "1" is defined for the first to fourth games, and boss MAP data "0" is defined for the fifth game. When the boss MAP data “0” is defined, a new boss MAP is randomly selected by referring to the boss MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 90.

<Enemy decision ART production ball lottery table>
FIG. 92 and FIG. 93 are enemies-deciding ART in-game production balls lottery tables for determining the production balls to be set in the apocalypse in the enemy-deciding ART. The in-art lottery ball lottery table defines the boss MAP data and lottery value information about the lottery balls to be set for each ART state. Note that in (A) of FIG. 92, the lottery value information for the effect balls is defined for the boss MAP data “0”, but a new boss is used rather than the lottery for effect balls based on the MAP data “0”. It is not used when priority is given to MAP lottery.

  Referring to FIGS. 92 and 93, when the boss MAP data is “1”, “2”, and “4”, the lottery effect balls are substantially constant regardless of the ART state, while the boss MAP data “3” is selected. In the case of “”, the lottery effect balls that are randomly selected greatly differ depending on the ART state. For example, referring to the ART state “28” and above in the case of the boss MAP data “3”, it can be seen that either the boss ball 7 or 8 is determined as the effect ball. The boss balls 7 and 8 are effect balls for which the continuation of the battle ART is decided when the opponents are decided (see FIG. 57). Also, referring to the boss MAP data correspondence table shown in FIG. 91, it can be seen that the boss MAP data “3” is defined by many boss MAPs, and in many cases, the effect ball is based on the boss MAP data “3”. You can see that is drawn.

  From this, it can be understood that the greater the value of the ART state, the more advantageous the ART is for the player, and since "28" or more is randomly selected as the ART state when the CZ is completed (see FIG. 89), the CZ is completed. It can be seen that the moving ART is easy to continue.

<Random lottery table for encouraging ART during production>
FIG. 94 is an effect determination ball upgrade lottery table during the enemy determination ART referred to for rewriting the enemy balls set in the apocalypse during the enemy determination ART into ally balls. The enemies-determined ART mid-stage production ball upgrade lottery table defines information on lottery values for the number of ally ball stocks for each internal winning combination. When the stock of one or more ally balls is determined by this lottery, the enemy balls are rewritten as ally balls according to the number of stocks. The timing of rewriting an enemy ball into a friend ball is arbitrary.

<Random lottery table with additional enemy power in Nakamura ART>
FIG. 95 is an enemy determination ART mid-team power additional lottery table that is referred to when the HP of the ally character is added to the lottery performed when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a friend ball. The enemy determination ART middle team power addition lottery table defines the HP addition amount of the teammate character for each internal winning combination. With reference to FIG. 95, it can be seen that the HP of the ally character increases when the ally ball is set in the apocalypse in the game this time and the "Bell winning" or higher.

<Boss power lottery table during enemy decision ART>
FIG. 96 is a boss power lottery table during the enemy determination ART referred to when determining the HP of the enemy character in the next game in which the enemy character of the opponent has been determined. The boss power lottery table during the enemy determination ART defines the lottery value information for the HP of the enemy character for each internal winning combination. Referring to FIG. 96, it can be seen that the HP of the enemy character is determined to be small when a rare combination other than the pure one is won. Note that the boss power lottery table during the enemy determination ART may be a common table for all enemy characters that are opponents, or a different table may be provided for each enemy character. By providing a different table for each enemy character, it is possible to determine the HP according to the personality of the enemy character.

<Various data tables referenced during Battle ART>
Next, various data tables referred to in the battle ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 106. Prior to description of these data tables, characteristics of each enemy character will be described.

<Boss status correspondence table>
FIG. 97 is a boss status correspondence table. Statuses such as offensive power, defensive power, and speed are set for the opponent characters boss 1 to boss 8, respectively. For example, boss 1 is an attack type, which has high attack power but slow speed. On the other hand, the boss 5 is a speed type and has a low attack power but a high speed. During the battle ART, a battle between the ally character and the enemy character is performed according to the characteristics of the enemy character.

  The bosses 7 and 8 are enemy characters whose continuation of the ART game state is decided at the time when they are determined as the opponent. As described above, in the ART game state, if the HP of the enemy character becomes 0 before the HP of the teammate character becomes 0, or even if the HP of the teammate character becomes 0, the number of sets in the ART game state remains. If yes, continue. The mode in which the ART game state continues when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined is arbitrary. For example, when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined as enemy characters, the HP of the enemy character is always 0 before the ally character. Alternatively, when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined as enemy characters, the number of sets in the ART game state is always 1 or more (for example, the bosses 7 and 8 are determined as enemy characters). In this case, the number of sets in the ART game state may be increased by 1, or even if the HP of the teammate character becomes 0, the number of sets in the ART game state may not be subtracted). In this respect, in the present embodiment, when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined as enemy characters, by adding 1 to the set number of the ART game state, even if the HP of the teammate character becomes 0, the ART game state is set. By making sure that the number of sets of No. 2 remains, the ART game state is continued when the bosses 7 and 8 are decided. Although detailed description is omitted, when the HPs of the bosses 7 and 8 can be set to 0 in the present embodiment, it is possible to shift to a so-called additional specializing zone. The type of the additional specialization zone is arbitrary, but in the case of the present embodiment, as the additional specialization zone, it is conceivable to add the number of sets in the ART game state or add the HP of the teammate character.

<Battle MAP lottery table>
98 to 100 are battle MAP lottery tables for lottery of battle MAPs for determining effect balls to be set in the apocalypse in battle ART. The battle MAP lottery table is provided for each type of enemy character that is an opponent, and defines the lottery value information for the transition destination battle MAP for each transition source battle MAP. FIG. 98 is a battle MAP lottery table corresponding to boss 1, FIG. 99 is a battle MAP lottery table corresponding to boss 2, and FIG. 100 is a battle MAP lottery table corresponding to boss 5. As described below, the lottery value information defined in the battle MAP lottery table depends on the speed set for the enemy character.

<Battle MAP data correspondence table>
The battle MAP defines the battle MAP data for determining the effect balls to be set in the apocalypse. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of battle MAP data defined in each battle MAP.

<Dot lottery table during battle ART>
FIG. 102 is a battle ball lottery table during battle ART for determining a play ball to be set in the apocalypse in the battle ART. The in-battle production ball lottery table defines the lottery value information about the production balls to be set for each battle MAP data. In addition, in (A) of FIG. 102, the lottery value information for the effect balls is defined for the battle MAP data “0”, but a new boss is used rather than the lottery for the effect balls based on the MAP data “0”. It is not used when priority is given to MAP lottery.

  Referring to FIG. 102, an enemy ball is easily drawn in the battle MAP data “1”, while an ally ball or an awakening ball is always drawn in the battle MAP data “2” and “3”. Further, referring to the battle MAP data comparison table shown in FIG. 101, it can be seen that seven battle MAPs form one set. Specifically, referring to the battle MAPs “1” to “7”, the battle MAP data continues to “2” and “3” after five “1” s, and the battle MAPs “8” to “14”, It can be seen that the same applies to the battle MAPs “15” to “21” and the battle MAPs “22” to “28”.

  Note that the battle MAPs “4”, “11”, “18”, and “25” are battle MAPs that are not actually randomized (the random determination value is 0 as shown in FIGS. 98 to 100). Therefore, in Pachi-slot 1, four battle MAPs (one is not lottery) for which the battle MAP data “1” where the enemy balls are easily drawn are defined, and battle MAP data “2” where the ally ball or the awakening ball is always lottery. A set of 6 with 2 battle MAPs for which "3" is specified is included.

  Here, the process returns to the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIGS. 98 to 100. In the battle MAP lottery table, the boss MAPs "6" "7" "13" "14" "20" "21" "that the battle MAP data" 2 "" 3 "in which the ally ball or the awakening ball is always randomly sampled are defined “27” and “28” are highlighted. When referring to the battle MAP lottery table, the battle MAP basically shifts to a battle MAP with a large numerical value one by one in the set, or the teammates or awakening balls in the set are always drawn. You can see that it will shift to Battle MAP. Specifically, from the battle MAP “1”, a battle MAP “2” having a larger numerical value or a battle MAP “6” in which a teammate or an awakening ball in the same set is surely drawn can be easily drawn. I understand.

  By configuring the battle MAP and the battle MAP data in this way, in the pachi-slot 1, the number of consecutive attacks of the enemy character is limited to a predetermined number (four in the present embodiment). That is, when the transition of the battle MAP has been performed more than the predetermined number of times (five times in the present embodiment), the transition to the battle MAP in which the teammates or the awakening balls are always randomly selected is conducted at least once. It should be noted that although the battle MAP “1” is changed to the battle MAP “9” and the like, the battle MAP “9” and the like is the second number of battle MAPs in the same set, and therefore the battle MAP is changed When the number of times exceeds the predetermined number, the battle MAP in which the ally balls or the like are surely drawn is transferred at least once.

  Further, comparing the battle MAP lottery tables of FIGS. 98 to 100, it can be seen that the probability that the ally ball or the awakening ball will be transferred to the battle MAP that is always lottery differs depending on the type of the enemy character of the opponent. For example, when the boss 1 (see FIG. 97) that is an attack type and has a slow speed is the enemy character, referring to the battle MAP lottery table in FIG. 98, the battle MAP “6” and “7” in which the ally balls etc. are surely drawn are displayed. It can be seen that the transition is relatively easy. If the boss 2 with a normal defense speed (see FIG. 97) is an enemy character, referring to the battle MAP lottery table in FIG. 99, a battle MAP in which a ally ball or the like is always lottery compared to the boss 1 is displayed. It turns out that it is difficult to shift to 6 "and" 7 ", and similarly, when the speed type boss 5 (see FIG. 97) is an enemy character, when the battle MAP lottery table in FIG. It can be seen that it is difficult to shift to the battle MAP “6” and “7” that are performed, and basically, the battle MAP “1” is shifted to the battle MAP having a larger numerical value in order.

  As described above, in the battle MAP lottery table, lottery value information is defined based on the speed set for the enemy character. As a result, in the battle ART, the effect balls are set based on the speed set for the enemy character, the faster the enemy is, the more enemy balls are set, and the slower the speed is, the more friendly balls are set. Become.

<Damage lottery table during Battle ART>
103 and 104 are battle-arts damage lottery tables used when reducing the HP of an enemy character or a teammate character in a battle ART. In the battle ART damage damage lottery table, the types of enemy characters to be opponents, the types of effect balls set in the apocalypse in this game, and the HP reduction amounts of enemy characters and ally characters for each internal winning combination are described. Specifies lottery value information.

  FIG. 103 is a damage lottery table during battle ART which is used when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an enemy ball. In FIG. 103, the damage lottery table during battle ART used when the boss 1 (see FIG. 97) having a high offensive power is the enemy character in order to make it possible to compare the differences depending on the status (offensive power) of the enemy character. (A) of FIG. 103 shows a damage lottery table during battle ART used when the boss 5 (see FIG. 97) having a low offensive power is an enemy character, and (B) of FIG. 103. Comparing the damage lottery table during battle ART in FIG. 103, when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, when the opponent is the boss 1, “15” is easily determined as the HP reduction amount of the teammate character. On the other hand, it can be seen that when the opponent is the boss 5, "5" is easily determined as the HP reduction amount of the teammate character.

  In addition, referring to FIG. 103, even if the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an enemy ball, if the winning combination is a rare role other than pure, then it is not an ally character but an enemy character. HP will be reduced. By configuring the damage lottery table during the battle ART in this way, the player can expect that the rare role will be determined as the internal winning role during the battle ART, and the interest during the ART can be increased. ..

  FIG. 104 is a battle ART damage damage lottery table used when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a friend ball or an awakening ball. In FIG. 104, in order to make it possible to compare the difference due to the status (defense) of the enemy character, FIG. 104 shows the battle ART damage damage lottery table used when the boss 1 with high defense (see FIG. 97) is the enemy character. (A) of FIG. 104 shows a damage lottery table during battle ART, which is used when the boss 5 (see FIG. 97) having low defense power is an enemy character, is shown in (B) of FIG. Comparing the damage lottery tables during battle ART in FIG. 104, when the opponent is the boss 1, it is easy to determine “5” as the HP reduction amount of the enemy character, while when the opponent is the boss 5, the enemy character is reduced. It can be seen that “10” or the like is easily determined as the HP reduction amount.

  In this way, by providing a damage lottery table during the battle ART according to the type of the enemy character serving as the opponent, the status (attack power and defense power) of the enemy character can be reflected, and various games during the battle ART can be performed. Can be converted.

<ART status lottery table>
105 and 106 are ART state lottery tables for lottery of a new ART state when it is decided to continue the ART in the battle ART. The ART state lottery table defines the type of opponent character of the opponent, the number of times the ART is continued, and the lottery value information for the destination ART state for each source ART state. 105 and 106 show an ART state lottery table that is referred to when the opponent character of the opponent is one of the bosses 1 to 6. If the opponent enemy character is one of the bosses 1 to 6 and the ART state of the transition source is "31" to "33", the same ART state is determined as the ART state of the transition destination. On the other hand, if the opponent enemy character is one of the bosses 7 and 8, and the transition source ART state is "31" to "33", a different ART state (for example, ART state "3", although not shown) , Etc.) will be determined as the destination ART state.

  Further, referring to FIGS. 105 and 106, it can be seen that when the number of continued ARTs exceeds 5, the state easily shifts to an ART state having a large numerical value.

<Description of operation of main control circuit>
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 51 of the main control circuit 41 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 112.

[Main operation processing of pachi-slot by control of main CPU]
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after power-on) of the pachi-slot 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 51 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 107 (hereinafter referred to as the main flow).

  First, when the power of the pachi-slot 1 is turned on, the main CPU 51 performs a power-on process (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally or the setting has been changed appropriately, and the initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 conducts initialization processing at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization processing, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 53 is cleared. The designated storage area here is, for example, a storage area such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area in which data needs to be erased for each unit game (game).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor (not shown) and the start switch 16S are checked.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a random value acquisition process (S4). In this processing, the main CPU 51 extracts a random number value (0 to 65535) for the internal winning combination lottery, and stores the extracted random number value in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53.

  Next, the main CPU 51 conducts internal lottery processing (S5). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random number value for the internal winning combination lottery extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 conducts reel stop initialization processing (S6). In this processing, reel stop control information used for stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination determined in S5 and the current game state. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 53 and used in the reel stop control process of S11.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a start command generation / storage process (S7). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of the start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and saves the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. Further, the start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 112. It should be noted that the start command data includes various kinds of information necessary for producing an internal winning combination and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs wait processing (S8). In this process, the main CPU 51 waits until the wait time elapses when the elapsed time from the start of the previous game has not passed the predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds).

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes reel rotation start processing (S9). In this process, the main CPU 51 requests rotation start of all reels. Then, when the rotation start of all reels is requested, the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R are driven by an interrupt process (see FIG. 112 described later) executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). Is controlled, and rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is subjected to acceleration control until the rotation speed thereof reaches a constant speed, and then controlled so that the constant speed is maintained.

  Next, the main CPU 51 conducts reel rotation start command generation and storage processing (S10). In this processing, the main CPU 51 generates the data of the reel rotation start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and saves the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 112. By this processing, the sub-control circuit 42 can recognize the start of reel rotation, and can determine the timing for executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes reel stop control processing (S11). In this process, the reel stop control information determined in S6 is used to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the timing of pressing the left stop button 19L, the middle stop button 19C, and the right stop button 19R.

  Next, the main CPU 51 conducts a winning search process (S12). In this process, the main CPU 51 compares the symbol combination displayed on the pay line after the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R are all stopped with the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 9 to 21). .. Then, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol combination (combination) defined by the symbol combination table is displayed on the pay line, and stores the determination result in the display combination storing area.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes medal payout processing (S13). In this process, the hopper 33 is driven and the credit number is updated based on the payout number of the symbol combination determined in S12, and the medals are paid out.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a winning operation command generation / storing process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates the data of the winning operation command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The winning operation command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 112. By this processing, the sub-control circuit 42 can recognize the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line, and can determine the timing of executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 51 conducts bonus end check processing (S15). In this processing, the main CPU 51 refers to various counters (not shown) for managing the timing of ending the bonus game, which are provided in the main RAM 53, and checks whether or not the operation of the bonus game is ended. The details of the bonus end check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 109 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 conducts bonus operation check processing (S16). In this process, the main CPU 51 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game and whether or not to perform the re-game. The details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 110 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs RT check processing (S17). In this process, the main CPU 51 updates the RT gaming state based on the combination of the symbols displayed. The RT check process is a process for updating the RT gaming state in the bonus non-operating state, and is omitted in the bonus state and the inter-flag state. The details of the RT check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, the internal lottery process performed in S5 in the main flow (see FIG. 107) will be described with reference to FIG. 108.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets an internal lottery table according to the gaming state (S31). That is, the main CPU 51 grasps the current game state by referring to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 51) and sets the internal lottery table (see FIGS. 22 to 26) according to the grasped game state.

  Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the random number value stored in the random number storage area (S32). Then, the main CPU 51 sets “1” as the initial value of the winning number.

  Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the internal lottery table to obtain the lottery value corresponding to the winning number, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value (S33). The winning number is information assigned to each winning combination that may be randomly selected in the internal lottery table. For example, when the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state in which bonuses are not won, the winning number "1" is given to "outgoing" and the winning number "2" is given to "F_black-black-black". (See FIG. 22). When the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state, the winning number "1" is given to "F_maintenance rep" and the winning number "2" is given to "F_123 rep". (See Figure 24).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the calculation result in S33 is less than 0 (negative value) (S34).

  When the main CPU 51 determines in S34 that the calculation result is not less than 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 updates the random number value and the winning number (S35). Specifically, the value of the calculation result is set to a random value, and the winning number is incremented by 1.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not all the winning numbers have been checked (S36). When it is determined in S36 that the main CPU 51 has not checked all the winning numbers (NO), the main CPU 51 returns the processing to S33 and repeats the processing from S33.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S36 that the main CPU 51 has checked all the winning numbers (YES), the main CPU 51 sets "0" as the data pointer (S37). That is, the main CPU 51 sets "0" as the small win / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer.

  Here, returning to the description of the process of S34 again, in S34, when the main CPU 51 determines that the calculation result is less than 0 (negative value) (YES), the main CPU 51 responds to the current winning number. , And a small win / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are acquired (S38).

  Then, after the processing of S37 or S38, the main CPU 51 acquires an internal winning combination based on the small combination / replay data pointer (S39).

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storing area (S40).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is "00000000" (S41). When the main CPU 51 determines in S41 that the data stored in the internal carryover combination storage area is not "00000000" (NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S48 described below.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S41 that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (YES), the main CPU 51 acquires the internal winning combination based on the bonus data pointer. (S42).

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storage area (S43).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the winning combination for BB is being carried over (S44). Referring to FIG. 49, the winning combination relating to BB is stored in any one of bits 0 to 4 of the internal carryover combination storing area. Therefore, in this processing, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not "1" is stored in any of bits 0 to 4 of the carryover combination storing area. When the main CPU 51 determines in S44 that the winning combination for BB is not being carried over (NO), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the processing of S46.

  On the other hand, in S44, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning combination relating to BB is being carried over (YES), the main CPU 51 sets the RT5 gaming state flag to ON (S45), and then proceeds to the processing of S46. Specifically, "1" is set in bit 4 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 51). By this process, when the winning combination related to BB is determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus non-winning state, the gaming state can be shifted to the RT5 gaming state between the flags.

  Next, in the processing of S46, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the winning combination relating to JACIN is being carried over. Referring to FIG. 49, the winning combination related to JACIN is stored in any of bit 5 to bit 7 of the carryover combination storing area. Therefore, in this processing, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not "1" is stored in any of bits 5 to 7 of the carryover combination storing area. When the main CPU 51 determines in S46 that the winning combination relating to BB is not being carried over (NO), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the process of S48.

  On the other hand, in S46, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning combination relating to JACIN is being carried over (YES), the main CPU 51 sets the RT4 gaming state flag to ON (S47), and then proceeds to the process of S48. Specifically, "1" is set in bit 3 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 51). Since the winning combination related to JACIN may be determined as an internal winning combination only during the bonus state, this processing causes the winning combination to be determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus state. The state can be shifted to the RT4 gaming state of the bonus state.

  Next, in the process of S48, the main CPU 51 updates the internal winning combination storing area based on the internal winning combination stored in the internal carryover combination storing area. After that, the main CPU 51 ends the internal lottery process, and moves the process to S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 107).

[Bonus end check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the bonus end check processing performed in S15 in the main flow (see FIG. 107) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 51) and determines whether or not "BB" is operating (S51). In S51, when the main CPU 51 determines that "BB" is not operating (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process, and moves the process to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 107).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S51 that "BB" is operating (YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" (S52). ). In addition, when the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0”, it means that the payout of medals exceeds 59 during the bonus state.

  In S52, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 51) and “RB”. It is determined whether or not is operating (S53). When the main CPU 51 determines in S53 that "RB" is not operating (NO), the main CPU 51 shifts the processing to S56.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S53 that "RB" is in operation (YES), the main CPU 51 performs the RB end time process (S54). In this process, the main CPU 51 clears the prize winning number counter and the game possible number counter, and turns off the game state flag (RB game state flag) corresponding to the operating "RB". Next, the main CPU 51 turns on the RT2 game state flag (S55).

  Next, in S56, the main CPU 51 conducts bonus end time processing. In this processing, the main CPU 51 clears the bonus end number counter, and turns off the game state flag (BB game state flag) corresponding to "BB" in operation. As shown in S53 to S56, when the operation of the BB (bonus state) ends during the RB game state, the RT2 game state of the bonus non-winning state is shifted to after the BB ends. On the other hand, if the operation of the BB ends in a state other than the RB game state, the RT game state in the bonus state is maintained and the bonus non-winning state is entered.

  Next, the main CPU 51 conducts bonus end command generation and storage processing (S57). In this processing, the main CPU 51 generates the data of the bonus end command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and saves the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The bonus end command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 112. By this processing, the sub control circuit 42 can recognize that the bonus state has ended, and a predetermined effect at the end of the bonus can be performed. After the processing of S57, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check processing, and moves the processing to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 107).

  On the other hand, in S52, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than “0” (NO), the main CPU 51 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 51) and refers to “RB It is determined whether or not is in operation (S58). When the main CPU 51 determines in S58 that "RB" is not in operation (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process and moves the process to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 107).

  On the other hand, in S58, when the main CPU 51 determines that “RB” is in operation (YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the possible winning number counter or the possible game number counter is “0”. (S59). In addition, when the possible winning number counter is "0", it means that a combination of symbols other than "off" is displayed eight times during the RB game state of the bonus state, and the possible game number counter is "0". In the case of, it means that the game has been played 12 times in the RB game state of the bonus state.

  In S59, when the main CPU 51 determines that neither the winning a prize number counter nor the game possible number counter is “0” (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. (See 107) (S107).

  On the other hand, in S59, when the main CPU 51 determines that either the prize winning number counter or the game possible number counter is “0” (YES), the main CPU 51 performs the RB end time process (S60). Next, the main CPU 51 turns on the RT2 game state flag (S61), ends the bonus end check process, and moves the process to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 107).

[Bonus activation check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the bonus end check processing performed in S16 in the main flow (see FIG. 107) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a symbol combination (see FIG. 27) related to “BB” is displayed (S71). In S71, when the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol combination relating to “BB” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 51 performs a bonus operation time process (S72). In this processing, the main CPU 51 sets the BB game state flag in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 51) to ON and sets the bonus end number counter to "59".

  Next, the main CPU 51 updates the RT5 gaming status flag in the gaming status flag storage area (see FIG. 51) to OFF (S73). Next, the main CPU 51 conducts bonus start command generation / storage processing (S74). In this processing, the main CPU 51 generates the data of the bonus start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. Further, the bonus start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 112. By this processing, the sub control circuit 42 can recognize that the bonus state has started, and a predetermined effect at the start of the bonus can be performed.

  When the process of S74 ends, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process, and advances the process to S17 of the main flow (see FIG. 107).

  On the other hand, in S71, when the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol combination relating to “BB” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 51 displays the symbol combination relating to “JACIN” (see FIG. 27). It is determined whether or not (S75). In S75, when the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol combination related to “JACIN” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 51 performs the RB operation process (S76). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets the RB game state flag in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 51) to ON, and also sets "8" to the possible winning number counter and "12" to the possible game number counter. ..

  Next, the main CPU 51 updates the RT4 gaming status flag in the gaming status flag storage area (see FIG. 51) to OFF (S77). When the process of S77 is completed, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process, and moves the process to S17 of the main flow (see FIG. 107).

  On the other hand, in S75, when the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol combination related to “JACIN” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol combination related to “replay” is displayed. (S78). In S78, when the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol combination relating to “replay” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process, and the process is in the main flow (see FIG. 107). Move to S17.

  On the other hand, in S78, when the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol combination relating to "replay" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 51 requests automatic insertion of medals (S79). That is, the main CPU 51 copies the insertion number counter to the automatic insertion number counter. After the processing of S79, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check processing, and moves the processing to S17 of the main flow (see FIG. 107).

[RT check processing]
Next, the RT check processing performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 107) will be described with reference to FIG. 111.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, the RT2 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, or the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state (S81). .. In S81, when the main CPU 51 determines that the gaming state is neither RT0 gaming state of bonus non-winning state, RT2 gaming state of bonus non-winning state, or RT4 gaming state of bonus non-winning state (NO), main The CPU 51 moves to the processing of S85 described later.

  On the other hand, in S81, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT0 gaming state is the bonus non-winning state, the RT2 gaming state is the bonus non-winning state, or the RT4 gaming state is the bonus non-winning state (YES). ), The main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not "bell spilled eyes" or "RT1 transition lip" is displayed (S82). In S82, when the main CPU 51 determines that neither "bell spilled eyes" nor "RT1 shift lip" is displayed (NO), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the processing of S85 described below.

  On the other hand, in S82, when the main CPU 51 determines that either "bell spilled eyes" or "RT1 shift lip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 51 turns off the RT game state flag that is currently on, and RT1 Turn on the gaming state. That is, in the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, the RT2 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, or the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, when the "bell spill" or "RT1 transition lip" is displayed, the main CPU 51 Shifts the gaming state to the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state. Next, the main CPU 51 sets the RT game number counter to 5 (S84).

  When NO in S81 or S82, or following S84, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state (S85). In S85, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is not in the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state (NO), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the processing of S91 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S85 that the RT0 gaming state is the bonus non-winning state (YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not "RT4 shift rep" is displayed (S86). In S86, when the main CPU 51 determines that "RT4 shift rep" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 51 turns on the RT4 gaming state flag. That is, when the "RT4 transition rep" is displayed in the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 51 shifts the gaming state to the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S88 that "RT4 shift rep" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether "RT3 shift rip" is displayed (S88). In S88, when the main CPU 51 determines that "RT3 shift rep" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 51 turns on the RT3 gaming state flag. That is, when "RT3 shift rep" is displayed in the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 51 shifts the gaming state to the RT3 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state. Next, the main CPU 51 sets the RT game number counter to 5 (S90).

  When NO in S85, S88, or following S87, S90, the main CPU 51 determines whether the gaming state is the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state or the RT3 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state (S91). ). In S91, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is neither the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state or the RT3 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the RT check process, and the main process is performed. The process moves to S2 in the flow (see FIG. 107).

  On the other hand, in S91, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is either the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state or the RT3 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state (YES), the main CPU 51 updates the RT game number counter ( 1 is subtracted) (S92). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the RT game number counter is 0 (S93). When the main CPU 51 determines in S93 that the RT game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the RT check process and moves the process to S2 in the main flow (see FIG. 107).

  On the other hand, in S93, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT game number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 turns off the RT game state flag which is currently on (S94). By turning off the RT game state flag which is currently on by this processing, the game state shifts to the RT0 game state of the bonus non-winning state. When this process ends, the main CPU 51 ends the RT check process and moves the process to S2 in the main flow (see FIG. 107).

<Interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU>
FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 51. This process is executed every 1.1172 milliseconds.

  First, the main CPU 51 saves registers (S101). Next, the main CPU 51 performs an input port check process (S102). In this process, signals input from various switches such as the stop switch 17S are checked.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a timer update process (S103). In this process, the main CPU 51 performs, for example, a process of subtracting the value of a predetermined timer for each interrupt process. Next, the main CPU 51 performs communication data transmission processing (S104). In this process, mainly, various commands are appropriately transmitted to the main control circuit 41 and the sub control circuit 42.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes reel control processing (S105). In this process, the main CPU 51 starts the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when the rotation start of all reels is requested, and thereafter, the respective reels rotate at a constant speed. The three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R are drive-controlled. Further, when the number of sliding symbols is determined, the main CPU 51 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding symbols. Then, the main CPU 51 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the planned stop position (the symbol at the planned stop position reaches the area on the pay line of the display window), and then the corresponding reel. The corresponding stepping motor is drive-controlled so that the rotation is decelerated and stopped.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a lamp / 7-segment driving process (S106). In this process, the main CPU 51 drives and controls the 7-segment display 6 to display the number of payouts, the number of credits, and the like. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a register restoration process (S107). Then, after that, the main CPU 51 ends the interrupt processing.

[Sub-control processing]
The sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 42 executes various processes according to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 113 to 137.

<Power-on processing>
FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing a power-on process of the sub CPU 81 when the power is turned on.

  First, the sub CPU 81 executes an initialization process (S320). In this process, the sub CPU 81 checks the sub RAM 83 for errors and initializes the task system. The task system includes a lamp control task which is a task group of timer interrupt synchronization, a sound control task, and a mother task which is a task group of VSYNC (Vertical Synchronization) interrupt synchronization.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 activates the lamp control task shown in FIG. 114 (S321). The lamp control task waits for the sub CPU 81 to receive a timer interrupt event message transmitted to the sub CPU 81 every 2 milliseconds, and in response to receiving the timer interrupt event message, various lamp This is a process of executing a process of controlling the lighting state.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 activates the sound control task shown in FIG. 115 (S322). In the sound control task, the sub CPU 81 controls the sound output state from the speakers 21L and 21R.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 activates the mother task shown in FIG. 116 (S323) and terminates the power-on process. The mother task is a VSYNC (vertical synchronization signal) interrupt synchronization task group, and a vertical synchronization signal (VSYNC interrupt signal) sent from the liquid crystal display device 10 when one frame of image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 10. To use.

<Lamp control task>
FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the lamp control task started in S321 of the power-on processing shown in FIG. 113.

  First, the sub CPU 81 executes a timer interrupt initialization process (S330). Next, the sub CPU 81 executes a lamp-related data initialization process (S331).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 executes waiting for a timer interrupt (S332). In this process, the sub CPU 81 executes a task group different from the timer interrupt synchronization until the sub CPU 81 receives the timer interrupt event message every 2 milliseconds.

  An example of a task group different from timer interrupt synchronization is a main board communication task which is a task group of command reception interrupt synchronization. Further, a task group (not shown) for power interrupt synchronization, a task group (not shown) for communication with the door monitoring unit, and the like can be given.

<Sound control task>
FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the sound control task started in S322 of the power-on processing shown in FIG. 113.

  First, the sub CPU 81 executes an initialization process of sound-related data related to the sound output state from the speakers 21L and 21R (S340). Next, the sub CPU 81 executes the task having the next priority, that is, the lamp control task, of the task group of timer interrupt synchronization which is the same group as the sound control task (S341).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 executes a sound data analysis process (S342), a sound effect execution process (S343), and executes the process of S341.

<Mother task>
FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the mother task activated in S323 of the power-on processing shown in FIG. 113.

  In the mother task, the sub CPU 81 activates the main task (S350), activates the main board communication task (S351), and activates the animation task (S352).

<Main task>
FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the main task started in S350 of the mother task shown in FIG.

  In the main task, the sub CPU 81 executes VSYNC interrupt initialization processing (S360) and waits for VSYNC interrupt (S361). Next, the sub CPU 81 executes drawing processing (S362), and executes processing of S361.

<Main board communication task>
FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the main board communication task activated in S351 of the mother task shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 initializes the communication message queue (S370) and checks the received command (S371).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a command different from the previous one is received (S372). If it is determined that a command different from the previous command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 executes the process of S371.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a command different from the previous command is received (YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the received command is a regular command, creates game information from the received command, and creates it. The game information is stored in the sub RAM 83 (S373). Next, the sub CPU 81 executes the command analysis process shown in FIG. 119 (S374), and executes the process of S371.

<Command analysis processing>
FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the command analysis processing executed in S374 of the main board communication task shown in FIG. 119.

  First, the sub CPU 81 executes effect content determination processing shown in FIG. 121 (S380), lamp data determination processing (S381), and sound data determination processing (S382), and registers each determined data. Then, (S383), the command analysis process ends.

<Anime task>
FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the animation task started in step S352 of the mother task shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 checks a change from the previous game information (S390). Next, the sub CPU 81 executes object control processing (S391). Specifically, when the check result that the game information is changed is obtained in S390, the sub CPU 81 controls the image according to the change of the game information.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 executes an animation task management process (S392). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 manages the order of images displayed in various effects. After executing the animation task management process, the sub CPU 81 executes the process of S390.

<Production content determination processing>
FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the effect contents determination processing executed in S380 of the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 119.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a start command has been received (S401). Here, if it is determined that the start command is received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the start command reception process shown in FIG. 122 (S402), and ends the effect content determination process. In the start command reception process, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the start command is set.

  On the other hand, when determining that the start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the reel rotation start command has been received (S403). If it is determined that the reel rotation start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes reel rotation start command reception time processing (S404), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the reel rotation start command reception process, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the reel rotation start command is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the reel rotation start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the reel stop command has been received (S405). If it is determined that the reel stop command is received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the reel stop command reception process (S406), and ends the effect content determination process. In the process at the time of receiving the reel stop command, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the reel stop command is set.

  On the other hand, when determining that the reel stop command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the winning operation command has been received (S407). Here, if it is determined that the winning operation command is received (YES), the sub CPU81 executes the winning operation command reception process shown in FIG. 132 (S408), and ends the effect content determination process. In the process for receiving the winning operation command, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the winning operation command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the bonus end command has been received (S409). Here, when it is determined that the bonus end command is received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the bonus end command reception time process shown in FIG. 137 (S410), and ends the effect content determination process. In the bonus end command receiving process, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the bonus end command is set.

  On the other hand, when determining that the bonus end command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the bonus start command has been received (S411). Here, if it is determined that the bonus start command is received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a bonus start command reception process (S412), and ends the effect content determination process. In the bonus start command receiving process, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the bonus start command is set. In the bonus start command reception process, the BB mode “0” is set as the initial value of the BB mode.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the bonus end command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 executes a process according to the other received command (S413), and ends the effect content determination process.

<Processing when a start command is received>
FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the start command reception process executed in S402 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 121.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the high-probability gaming state (S421). When it is determined in S421 that the game state is either the normal game state or the high-probability game state (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently performs the normal start CZ / ART lottery shown in FIG. 123 (S422). In the normal start CZ / ART lottery, the above-described transition lottery (A) (D) at the time of start is performed based on the internal winning combination and the effect ball set in the apocalypse in the game this time.

  Subsequent to the processing of S422, the sub CPU 81 performs the apocalypse operation processing shown in FIG. 124 (S423). In this apocalypse operation processing, the sub CPU 81 performs control for starting or ending the operation of the apocalypse.

  Subsequent to the processing of S423, or if it is determined in S421 that the game state is neither the normal game state nor the high-probability game state (NO), the sub CPU 81 then continues in the RT4 game state in which the game state is the normal game state. It is determined whether or not there is (S424). More specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the gaming state managed by the sub side is the normal gaming state and the RT gaming state managed by the main side is the RT4 gaming state. When it is determined in S424 that the game state is the RT4 game state of the normal game state (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently performs the high-probability game state transition processing shown in FIG. 125 (S425). In this probabilistic game state transition processing, the sub CPU 81 performs lottery of avoidance points in order to shift the game state from the normal game state to the high-probability game state.

  Subsequent to the processing of S425, or when it is determined in S424 that the gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state of the normal gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state. Yes (S426). When it is determined in S426 that the game state is the high-probability game state (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently performs the high-probability middle effect registration process shown in FIG. 126 (S427). In this high-probability medium effect registration processing, the sub CPU 81 performs an effect (push order navigation) for avoiding the main-side game state from shifting from the RT4 game state to the RT1 game state based on the avoidance point. ..

  Subsequent to the processing of S427 or in S426, if it is determined that the gaming state is not the high-probability gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the gaming state is CZ (S428). When it is determined in S428 that the game state is CZ (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently carries out CZ start ART lottery processing shown in FIG. 127 (S429). In the ART lottery process at the time of CZ start, the sub CPU 81 performs the above-mentioned transfer lottery (C) and the like.

  Subsequent to the processing of S429 or in S428, if it is determined that the game state is not CZ (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the game state is the bonus state (during BB) (S430). ). When it is determined in S430 that the game state is the bonus state (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently performs the BB ART lottery process shown in FIG. 128 (S431). In this BB ART lottery process, the sub CPU 81 performs the above-mentioned transfer lottery (F) and the like.

  Subsequent to the processing of S431 or in S430, if it is determined that the gaming state is not the bonus state (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the gaming state is the ART gaming state (during ART). (S432). When it is determined in S432 that the game state is the ART game state (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently performs the ART process shown in FIG. 129 (S433) and ends the start command reception process. In the processing during ART, the sub CPU 81 determines the content of effects in the enemy determination ART and the battle ART. On the other hand, in S432, when it is determined that the game state is not the ART game state (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the start command reception process.

<CZ / ART lottery process at normal start>
FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the normal start CZ / ART lottery processing executed in S422 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 refers to the start-time ART lottery table shown in FIGS. 59 to 61 on the basis of the internal winning combination and the effect ball set in the apocalypse in the game this time, and shifts to CZ / ART lottery. (A) and (D) are performed (S441). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the CZ is won in this lottery (S442). When the CZ has been won (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the CZ to the game state of the next game (S443), and ends the normal start CZ / ART lottery process.

  On the other hand, if the CZ has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART has been won in the lottery in S441 (S444). If the player has not won the ART (NO), the normal start CZ / ART lottery process ends, while if the player has won the ART (YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the game state is the ART game state. The enemy determination ART is set (S445). Since the ART game state is the RT4 game state on the main side, the RT4 transition lip is displayed and the main side must shift to the RT4 game state. Therefore, "to set the enemy decision ART in the ART game state as the game state" does not mean that the game state of the next game becomes the enemy decision ART in the ART game state, but the RT4 game state on the main side. It means that the game state of the sub side becomes the enemy determining ART of the ART game state when the process shifts to. This also applies to the following.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 89 to randomly draw the ART state based on the game state at the time of winning the ART, and sets the lottery result (S446). When this process ends, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal start CZ / ART lottery process.

<Apocalypse operation processing>
FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the apocalypse actuation process executed in S423 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the apocalypse flag is on (S451). At this time, if it is determined that the apocalypse flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 81 shifts the processing to S457.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S451 that the apocalypse flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently carries out apocalypse lottery based on the current winning mode (S452). Specifically, with reference to the apocalypse actuation random determination table of FIG. 67 (C), the amount of addition or the amount of subtraction of the guaranteed number is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination. Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 updates the current guaranteed number of times based on the lottery result of S452 (S453).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the guaranteed number of times is 1 or more (S454). When it is determined that the number of legal phases is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 81 lottery the effect balls, sets them in the apocalypse (S455), and proceeds to the processing of S462. Specifically, the sub CPU 81 lottery the apocalypse MAP, and lottery the effect balls based on the MAP data defined in the apocalypse MAP (see FIGS. 68 to 71). Further, in this processing, the sub CPU 81 upgrades the effect balls set in the apocalypse with a predetermined probability when the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination.

  On the other hand, when determining that the guaranteed number of times is not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 81 updates the apocalypse flag to off, ends the operation of the apocalypse (S456), and then shifts to the processing of S462.

  If it is determined that the apocalypse flag is not turned on in S451 (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently carries out the apocalypse lottery based on the current winning mode (S457). Specifically, with reference to the apocalypse operation lottery table of FIGS. 67 (A) and 67 (B), the added amount of the guaranteed number is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination. Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 updates the current guaranteed number of times based on the lottery result of S457 (S458).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the guaranteed number of times is 1 or more (S459). When it is determined that the number of legal phases is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the apocalypse flag and starts the apocalypse operation (S460). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 lottery the effect balls and sets them in the apocalypse (S461). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 lottery the apocalypse MAP, and lottery the effect balls based on the MAP data defined in the apocalypse MAP (see FIGS. 68 to 71).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 conducts a lottery for transition to a winning mode based on the internal winning combination (S462). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 randomly refers to the winning mode of the transfer destination by referring to the mode transfer lottery tables shown in FIGS. 62 to 66. Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 sets the lottery result as the winning mode of the next game (S463), and ends the apocalypse operation process.

<High probability game state transition processing>
FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the high-probability game state transition processing executed in S425 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 122.

  First, the sub CPU 81 randomizes the avoidance points based on the internal winning combination (S465). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 randomly refers to the avoidance table lottery table shown in FIG. 74 to randomly add the avoidance points. Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery of the avoidance points is won, that is, whether or not the avoidance points are added by 1 or more (S466). If the winning has been won (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets an avoidance point based on the lottery result (S467), and ends the high-probability game state transition processing. On the other hand, if not winning (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the high-probability gaming state transition processing.

<High probability medium performance registration processing>
126 is a flowchart showing the high-probability middle effect registration process executed in S427 of the start command reception process shown in FIG. 122.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the push order bell or the push order lip is determined as the internal winning combination (S471). When it is determined that neither the push-order bell nor the push-order lip has been determined as the internal winning combination (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the high-probability middle effect registration processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the push order bell or the push order lip is determined as the internal winning combination (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether the avoidance point is 1 or more (S472). If it is determined that the avoidance points are not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the high-probability middle effect registration process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the avoidance point is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the navigation data that is the correct answer in the pressing order (S473). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the avoidance point (S474), and ends the high-probability intermediate effect registration process.

  In this way, in the high probability game state, when the push order bell or the push order lip is determined as the internal winning combination, the correct push order is notified based on the avoidance point. For the player, by playing the game according to the notification, the high-probability game state can be continued, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. Here, the high-probability game state is easier to win the transition lottery to the ART than the normal game state, and when the correct answer push order is notified in the high-probability game state, the player is in the high-probability game state. The benefit of continuing is already granted. Therefore, when the correct answer pushing order is notified in the high probability game state, the lottery result of the transition lottery in the game may be discarded (invalid). This can prevent the player's profit from becoming excessive.

<ART lottery process at CZ start>
FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the CZ start ART lottery processing executed in S429 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 122.

  First, the sub CPU 81 updates the number of continuous games of CZ (S481). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the first game of CZ (S482). When the sub CPU 81 determines that it is the first game of CZ (YES), it subsequently lots and sets CZ_MAP. Specifically, the sub CPU 81 refers to the CZ_MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 76, and randomly selects and sets the CZ_MAP used in CZ (S483).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines and sets the initial value of the invalid point (S484). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 refers to the invalid point lottery table shown in FIG. 78 (A) to determine and set the initial value of the invalid point.

  After S484 or when determining in S482 that the game is not the first CZ game (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently lots the effect balls and sets them in the apocalypse (S485). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 refers to the CZ in-game effect lottery table shown in FIG. 79 to randomly draw and set the effect balls based on the final effect ball currently set. Further, in this processing, when the number of invalid points is 1 or more, the sub CPU 81 rewrites the developed ball set in the apocalypse to the avoidance ball.

  It is determined whether or not it is the 30th game of CZ (S486). When it is determined that it is the 30th game of CZ (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently sets the enemy determination ART in the ART gaming state as the gaming state (S487). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 89 to randomly draw and set the ART state based on the CZ mode 2 (S488). After that, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART lottery process at CZ start.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the 30th game of CZ (NO), the sub CPU 81 randomly draws and adds invalid points based on the internal winning combination (S489). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 refers to the invalid point lottery table shown in FIGS. 78 (B) and (C) to randomly draw the additional amount of invalid points and add the added amount to the invalid points currently held.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a development ball and the push-order bell is determined as an internal winning combination (S490). When all the conditions are satisfied (YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the number of invalid points is 1 or more (S491). When determining that the number of invalid points is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently subtracts 1 from the invalid points (S492), and sets the effect data for the current CZ mode notification (S493).

  This effect data gives, for example, an effect that informs or suggests that the current CZ mode is 1 or that the CZ mode will increase from 0 to 1 in the game within a few times (for example, a few times). Is production data for. Specifically, the effect data that the probability of being set is different depending on whether the CZ mode is 1 or 0, or when the CZ mode is increased from 0 to 1 in a predetermined number of times of the game and when the CZ mode is within the predetermined number of times. In the game, the effect data is different in the probability that it is set when it does not rise from 0 to 1. This enables the player to guess or grasp the current CZ mode when the number of invalid points is 1 or more.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S491 that the number of invalid points is not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 81 refers to the CZ in-art ART lottery table shown in FIG. 80, and moves to the ART lottery (C) based on the current CZ mode. ) Is performed, and the lottery flag is set to ON (S494). As described above, during the CZ, if the development ball is set and if the push order bell is won, the transition lottery (C) is performed, but if the correct answer is obtained in the push order when stopped, the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) becomes invalid. To be done. The lottery completion flag is used to determine whether to invalidate or maintain the lottery result when stopped. When the process of S494 ends, the sub CPU 81 ends the CZ start ART lottery process.

  On the other hand, in S490, if either condition is not satisfied (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an avoidance ball ( S495). When it is determined that the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is the avoidance ball (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the effect data for the current CZ mode notification (S496), and the CZ start ART lottery process. To finish. Further, in S495, when it is determined that the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is not the avoidance ball (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the CZ start ART lottery process.

<ART lottery process in BB>
FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the BB ART lottery process executed in S431 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not 7 sets of rips have been determined as internal winning combinations (S501). When it is determined that the 7-combination lip has been determined as the internal winning combination (YES), the sub CPU 81 refers to the BB start ART lottery table shown in FIG. 83 and performs the transfer lottery (F) to ART in BB. .. Referring to FIG. 83, since the transfer lottery (F) is always won, the sub CPU 81 sets the ART winning flag to ON (S502). The ART winning flag is information indicating that the player has won the ART in the middle of the bonus state, and is referred to when the bonus ends.

  Subsequent to S502, or if it is determined in S501 that the 7-repeat lip is not determined as the internal winning combination (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently refers to the BB medium mode lottery table shown in FIGS. 84 and 85. Then, the mode-up lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination (S503). Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the BB mode based on the lottery result (S504), and ends the BB in-art lottery process.

<Processing during ART>
FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the during-ART process executed in S433 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game state is during enemy determination ART (S511). If it is determined that the enemy determination ART is not in progress (NO), the sub CPU 81 then performs the battle ART in-process shown in FIG. 131 (S517), and ends the ART in-process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the enemy determination ART is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the determined flag is ON (S512). The determined flag is information for determining whether or not the enemy character of the opponent has been determined during the enemy determination ART. If it is determined that the determined flag is not ON (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently performs the enemy determination ART in-process shown in FIG. 130 (S516), and ends the ART in-process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the determined flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently refers to the enemy determination ART boss power lottery table shown in FIG. 96 to determine the HP of the enemy character based on the internal winning combination. Yes (S513). Then, the effect data for introducing the enemy character is set (S514). The effect data for introducing the enemy character is, for example, effect data for displaying the boss status shown in FIG. 97. Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 turns off the determined flag, sets the battle ART in the game state of the next game (S515), and finishes the processing during ART.

<Processing during enemy decision ART>
FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the enemy determination ART in-process executed in S516 of the ART in-process shown in FIG. 129.

  First, the sub CPU 81 randomly draws effect balls and sets them in the apocalypse (S521). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 lottery the effect balls based on the boss MAP data defined in the boss MAP and the ART state (see FIGS. 90 to 93). Further, in this processing, the sub CPU 81 also performs lottery of the ally balls, and if there is a stock, rewrites the boss ball set in the apocalypse as the ally ball (see FIG. 94). When using the guaranteed number of times for guaranteeing the number of continuous games of the enemy determination ART as described above, the process of S521 may not be performed between the guaranteed number of games.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 performs HP initial setting processing for the teammate character (S522). In this process, the sub CPU 81 sets the HP of the teammate character to the initial value when the HP of the teammate character is less than the initial value (HP50).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a boss ball (S523). If it is determined that the boss ball is set (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the bell is won (S524). At this time, if it is determined that the win is not a bell win (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the enemy determination ART in-progress processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning is bell (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines an enemy character corresponding to the boss ball as an opponent (S525). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 sets the determined flag to ON (S526), and ends the enemy determination ART process.

  On the other hand, in S523, when it is determined that the boss ball is not set (that is, the ally ball is set) (NO), the sub CPU 81 refers to the enemy determination ART intermediate ally power addition lottery table shown in FIG. Based on the winning combination, the HP of the ally character is added to the lottery (S527). Next, the sub CPU 81 updates the HP of the teammate character based on the lottery result (S528), and ends the enemy determination ART process.

<Processing during Battle ART>
FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the battle ART mid-process executed in S517 of the ART mid-process shown in FIG. 129.

  First, the sub CPU 81 lottery the effect balls and sets them in the apocalypse (S531). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 lottery the effect balls based on the battle MAP data specified in the battle MAP (see FIGS. 98 to 102). Further, in this processing, the sub CPU 81 also rewrites the enemy ball based on the awakening ball, and when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is the awakening ball and is equal to or more than the bell winning. , Rewrite the enemy ball set in the apocalypse as a friend ball.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 conducts damage lottery based on the effect balls and the internal winning combination (S532). Specifically, when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an enemy ball, the sub CPU 81 conducts damage lottery by referring to the battle ART medium damage lottery table illustrated in FIG. 103, When the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a friend ball or an awakening ball, damage lottery is performed by referring to the battle ART damage damage lottery table illustrated in FIG.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 updates the HP of the enemy character or the ally character based on the lottery result (S533). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the HP of the teammate character is 0 or less (S534). If the HP of the teammate character is determined to be 0 or less (YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART game state, sets the normal game state to the game state of the next game (S535), and ends the battle ART process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the HP of the ally character is not 0 or less (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the HP of the enemy character is 0 or less (S536). When it is determined that the HP of the enemy character is not 0 or less (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the process during the battle ART. On the other hand, when determining that the HP of the enemy character is 0 or less (YES), the sub CPU 81 refers to the ART state lottery table illustrated in FIGS. 105 and 106 to set the ART state based on the type of the enemy character and the number of continuations. Lottery and set (S537). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 sets the enemy determination ART in the game state of the next game (S538), and finishes the process during the battle ART.

<Processing when winning command is received>
FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing a winning operation command reception process which is executed in S408 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the high-probability gaming state (S541). When it is determined that the game state is either the normal game state or the high-probability game state (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently performs the normal end time CZ / ART lottery shown in FIG. 133 (S542). In the normal end CZ / ART lottery, the above-mentioned start transition lottery (A) (D) is performed based on the effect balls set in the apocalypse in the game this time.

  Subsequent to the processing of S542, or when it is determined in S541 that the game state is neither the normal game state nor the high-probability game state (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently sets the RT4 game state in which the game state is the normal game state. It is determined whether there is any (S543). If it is determined that the gaming state is the RT4 gaming state of the normal gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently performs the high-probability transition determination process shown in FIG. 134 (S544). In this high-probability transition determination processing, it is determined whether or not the RT4 gaming state in the normal gaming state can be shifted to the high-probability gaming state.

  Subsequent to the processing of S544 or when determining in S543 that the gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state of the normal gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state. Yes (S545). When it is determined that the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently performs a high-probability end determination process shown in FIG. 135 (S546). In this high-probability end determination processing, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not to end the high-probability game state, based on the combination of the displayed symbols.

  Subsequent to the processing of S546 or in S545, if it is determined that the gaming state is not the high-probability gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the gaming state is CZ (S547). When it is determined that the gaming state is CZ (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently carries out a CZ lottery result management process shown in FIG. 136 (S548). In the during-CZ lottery result management processing, the sub CPU 81 determines whether to maintain or invalidate the above-described transfer lottery (C) performed during the CZ.

  When the process of S548 is completed or if it is determined that the game state of S547 is not CZ (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the process for receiving the command for winning operation.

<CZ / ART lottery process at normal end>
FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the normal end CZ / ART lottery processing executed in S542 of the winning operation command reception processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the apocalypse flag is on (S551). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the apocalypse flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the normal end CZ / ART lottery process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the apocalypse flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not it is at least a bell prize (S552). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the winning is not equal to or more than the bell winning (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the normal end CZ / ART lottery process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is equal to or more than the bell winning (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently refers to the reel stop ART lottery table shown in FIG. 72, and based on the effect ball set in the apocalypse in the game this time. The transfer lottery (A) (D) to CZ and ART is performed (S553).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the CZ is won in the lottery (S554). If the CZ has been won (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets CZ to the game state of the next game (S555), and ends the CZ / ART lottery process at the normal end.

  On the other hand, when the CZ is not won (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART is won (S556). If the player has not won the ART (NO), the normal end CZ / ART lottery process ends, while if the player has won the ART (YES), the sub CPU 81 determines the ART game state as the game state. The enemy determination ART is set (S557). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 89 to randomly draw the ART state based on the game state at the time of winning the ART, and sets the lottery result (S558). Upon completion of this process, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal end CZ / ART lottery process.

<High probability transition determination processing>
FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing the high-probability transition determination processing executed in S544 of the winning operation command reception processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the bell spilled eye or the RT1 shift lip is displayed (S561). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the bell spill or the RT1 shift lip is displayed (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently clears the number of replays and the avoidance points (S562), and ends the high-probability shift determination processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the bell spilled eyes nor the RT1 shift lip is displayed (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the avoidance point is 1 or more (S563). When the avoidance point is determined to be 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the high probability game state to the game state of the next game (S564). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 clears the number of replays (S565), and ends the high-probability transition determination process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the avoidance points are not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a combination of symbols related to replay other than the RT1 transition rep is displayed (S566). When it is determined that the combination of symbols relating to replay other than the RT1 transition rep is not displayed (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the high probability transition determination process. On the other hand, if it is determined that a combination of symbols relating to replay other than the RT1 transition rep is displayed (YES), the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the number of replays (S567), and ends the high probability transition determination process.

  In this way, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, when the main side shifts to the RT4 game state during the normal game state, the normal game state is maintained until the avoidance point is given, and the avoidance point is given. Transition to high probability game state. As in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine in which the situation in which the player is accidentally transitioned to the RT4 gaming state is set to the chance section instead of the penalty section, it is necessary to adjust the balance so as not to be too advantageous to the player. In this regard, even if the main side shifts to the RT4 gaming state, it is possible to adjust the balance of the profits of both the player and the game store by treating it as the normal gaming state until the avoidance point is given. Of course, the balance of the profits of both sides may be adjusted in the entire gaming machine, and therefore, it may be possible to immediately shift from the normal gaming state to the high-probability gaming state at the stage of shifting to the RT4 gaming state on the main side.

<High probability end determination processing>
FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the high-probability end determination processing executed in S546 of the winning operation command reception processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the bell-eye drops or the RT1 shift lip is displayed (S571). When it is determined that neither the bell-folded eye nor the RT1 shift lip is displayed (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the high-probability end determination processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the bell spilled eye or the RT1 shift lip is displayed (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently clears the avoidance point (S572). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 sets the normal game state to the game state of the next game (S573), and ends the high-probability end determination processing.

<CZ lottery result management process>
FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the CZ random determination result management processing executed in S548 of the winning operation command reception processing shown in FIG. 132.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery flag is on (S581). When it is determined that the lottery completion flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the CZ during lottery result management process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the correct answer is made in the order of pressing (S582). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the stop operation has been performed in the pushing order according to the pushing order bell that was won in S490 of FIG. 127, in other words, according to the “C_CD bell (see FIG. 19)”. It is determined whether or not a combination of symbols is displayed. If it is determined that the answer is correct in the order of pressing according to the pressing order bell (YES), the sub CPU 81 discards (invalidates) the lottery result (S583), and ends the CZ during lottery result management processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the answer is not correct in the pressing order according to the pressing order bell (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the winning of ART is successful (S584). When it is determined that the ART is not won (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently sets the normal gaming state to the gaming state of the next game (S587), and ends the CZ lottery result management process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the player has won the ART (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART determination enemy ART ART as the game state (S585). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 89 to randomly draw the ART state based on the game state at the time of winning the ART, and sets the lottery result (S586). When this process ends, the sub CPU 81 ends the during-CZ lottery result management process.

<Processing when bonus end command is received>
FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing a bonus end command reception process executed in S410 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 121.

  First, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BB end ART lottery table shown in FIG. 86 to perform the transfer lottery (F) to ART based on the current BB mode (S591). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not an ART is won (S592). If it is determined that the ART is not won (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the ART winning flag is turned on (S593). If both S592 and S593 are NO, the sub CPU 81 sets the normal gaming state to the gaming state of the next game (S596), and finishes the bonus end command reception process.

  On the other hand, in the case of YES in either one of S592 and S593, the sub CPU 81 sets the enemy determination ART in the ART gaming state as the gaming state (S594). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 89 to randomly draw the ART state based on the game state at the time of winning the ART, and sets the lottery result (S595). When this process ends, the sub CPU 81 ends the bonus end command reception process.

[Effect of Pachi-slot 1]
The pachi-slot 1 according to the present invention has been described above. According to such a pachi-slot 1, the following effects can be expected.

<Effect of JACIN carried over during bonus state>
In Pachi-slot 1, when one of the winning combinations related to JACIN (“F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, “F_JACIN3”) is decided as the internal winning combination, until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed (while carrying over) ), It becomes RT4 game state of the bonus state. In this bonus state RT4 game state, JAC1 series replays such as "F_J1 upper row 7 rep" to "F_J1 cross 7 rep", JAC2 series replays such as "F_J2 chance rep 1" to "F_J2 cherry rep", and "F_FJ3" JAC3 series replays such as “chance rip 1” to “F_J3 cherry rep” can be determined as internal winning combinations (see FIGS. 24 and 25).

  In the pachi-slot 1, stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed based on the gaming state and the internal winning combination. For example, if a JAC1 series replay is decided as an internal winning combination while "F_JACIN1" is carried over as an internal winning combination, in the game, two types of combinations, "F_JACIN1" and JAC1 series replay, are internal. When the replay of JAC1 system is decided as the internal winning combination in the state where “F_JACIN2” is carried over as the internal winning combination, it is determined as “F_JACIN2” in the game. Two types of winning combinations, JAC1 series replay, have been decided as internal winning combinations.

  Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1, the stop control can be changed according to the type of the winning combination relating to the JACIN, and when the JAC1 system replay to the JAC3 system replay are determined as the internal winning combination, Stop control is performed so that a combination of symbols having a corresponding relationship shown by 46 is displayed. By varying the privilege (ART) given to the player by using such control, in the pachi-slot 1, it is possible to change whether or not the privilege is given according to the type of carryover combination, and thus the bonus. It is possible to diversify the game in the state and enhance the interest of the game in the bonus state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 46, when the replay of the JAC1 system is determined as the internal winning combination while "F_JACIN1" is carried over as the internal winning combination, "7 sets of rep" are displayed and "F_JACIN2" is displayed. When the JAC1 system replay is determined as the internal winning combination while being carried over as the internal winning combination, "normal rep" is displayed. In this way, by changing the stop control depending on the situation in which the privilege is granted and the situation in which the privilege is not granted, it is possible to know whether or not the privilege is awarded from the combination of the symbols displayed, so that the game can be played. The player has a strong interest in the combination of the displayed symbols, and can enhance the interest of the game in the bonus state.

  In addition, referring to FIG. 46, in the pachi-slot 1, stop control capable of displaying "7 sets of replies" is performed only when the replay is the JAC1 system, and when the replay is the JAC2 system or the JAC3 system, the stop control is performed. It is supposed to perform stop control that cannot display "7 replies". In this regard, even in the case of the JAC2 system replay or the JAC3 system replay, the stop control may be performed so that the “7 sets of rep” can be displayed. Specifically, when a JAC2-based replay is decided as an internal winning combination while "F_JACIN2" is carried over as an internal winning combination, stop control capable of displaying "7 sets of replies" is performed, and "F_JACIN1" Alternatively, if the replay of the JAC2 system is determined as the internal winning combination while “F_JACIN3” is carried over as the internal winning combination, the stop control that cannot display “7 sets of rep” is performed. Similarly, when a replay of the JAC3 series is determined as an internal winning combination while "F_JACIN3" is carried over as an internal winning combination, stop control capable of displaying "7 sets of replies" is performed and "F_JACIN1" or " When the replay of the JAC3 series is determined as the internal winning combination while "F_JACIN2" is carried over as the internal winning combination, the stop control that cannot display "7 sets of replies" is performed.

  Then, when “7 sets of rep” can be displayed, by referring to the ART lottery table at the time of BB start shown in FIG. 83, the transfer lottery (F) to the ART in the bonus state is performed to carry out the carryover combination. Whether or not a privilege is given can be made different depending on the type, and the interest of the game in the bonus state can be enhanced.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, the probability that the privilege is awarded by making the JAC1 system replay, the JAC2 system replay, and the JAC3 system replay different as the internal winning combination is determined. It is possible to increase the interest of the game in the bonus state.

  It should be noted that the combination relationship between the carry-over combination and the winning combination capable of displaying “7 sets of rips” is arbitrary. For example, for the JAC1 series replay, the only carryover combination that can display “7 complete rep” is “F_JACIN1”, and for the JAC2 series replay, the “7 complete rep” can be displayed. There are two types of “F_JACIN1” and “F_JACIN2”, and for JAC3 replays, the carryover combinations capable of displaying “7 sets of rep” may be all “F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, and “F_JACIN3”. Of course, the combination is not limited to such a combination, and may be an arbitrary combination.

<Effect of high probability game state>
In Pachi-slot 1, the RT4 game state is established as a high RT state in which the probability of a replay related role being determined as an internal winning combination is high, and when winning the transition to ART, the information of advantageous stop operation in this RT4 game state is notified. By doing this, the ART gaming state is realized (see FIG. 55). In the pachi-slot 1, the RT4 gaming state is shifted to the RT4 gaming state when the correct answer is given in the pushing order according to the pushing order lip. In Pachi-slot 1, if the player does not win the transition to ART and accidentally shifts to the RT4 game state due to a stop operation, it is not treated as a penalty and shifts to ART even in the RT4 game state that was accidentally shifted. Perform lottery such as lottery that is advantageous to the player. Since the RT4 gaming state is a high RT state, it is possible to play a game without consuming medals. Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1, the RT4 gaming state not winning the ART is set as a transition chance section to the ART. It is possible to enhance the interest in the high RT state where the privilege is not given.

  In addition, since the transfer lottery to the ART is performed during the RT4 gaming state, the strategic nature for the stop operation during the normal gaming state is increased, and the interest during the normal gaming state can be enhanced. Specifically, in the case of a pachi-slot that handles the case of accidentally shifting to the RT4 game state by a stop operation as a penalty, the stop operation during the normal game state is simple (for example, the first stop operation so as not to receive the penalty). Must be done for the left reel). In this regard, in the pachi-slot 1, since the penalty is not imposed during the RT4 game state that is accidentally transferred, the player can freely perform the stop operation during the normal game state, and only the playability in the normal game state is used. The operability can also be improved.

  Further, in the pachi-slot 1, as long as there is an avoidance point, information of a stop operation advantageous in the RT4 gaming state that is accidentally shifted (push order for avoiding the transition to the RT1 gaming state) is notified. As a result, if the player accidentally shifts to the RT4 gaming state, the player does not immediately shift to the normal gaming state, and can receive the lottery for shifting to ART with a high replay winning probability for a predetermined period. ..

  In addition, by setting the RT4 gaming state to a high-probability gaming state in which there is a high probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to ART, the RT4 gaming state that was accidentally transitioned can be set as a transition chance section to ART, and a privilege is granted. Not entertaining during a high RT condition can be enhanced.

  Further, in the pachi-slot 1, an RT0 game state that can be shifted to the RT4 game state and a RT1 game state that cannot be shifted to the RT4 game state are provided as the normal game state. In the pachi-slot, it is necessary to adjust the balance between the profit on the player side and the profit on the game store side so as not to give an excessive profit to either the player or the game store. In this regard, when comparing the pachi-slot 1 according to the present invention, in which the RT4 game state that is accidentally transitioned is set as a transition opportunity section to ART, and other game machines in which the RT4 game state that is accidentally transitioned is set as a penalty section, comparison is made. The pachi-slot 1 according to the present invention is advantageous to the player as compared with other gaming machines. Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1, the balance of the profits of both parties can be adjusted by providing the RT1 gaming state in which the RT4 gaming state cannot be shifted. As a result, it is possible to diversify the variables for adjusting the profit balance of both parties, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine rich in playability.

<Effect of apocalypse during normal gaming state (high probability gaming state)>
In the pachi-slot 1, a complete-running type CZ is provided as a chance zone of ART, and when the apocalypse operates during the normal game state and the high-probability game state, the lottery (A) (D) for shifting to the CZ when the reel is stopped is performed. This transition lottery (A) (D) has a probability according to the effect balls (lottery balls 1 to 4, confirmed balls) set in the apocalypse, when the combination of displayed symbols is “bell winning” or more. Done. In this way, not only the contents of the effect (effect ball set in the apocalypse), but also the combination of the symbols displayed as the result of the game are taken into consideration, and the transfer lottery (A) (D) is performed, thereby changing the game state. Against this, it is possible to intervene the operation of the player, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

  In addition, the lottery (A) (D) for shifting to CZ when the reels are stopped is performed when the combination of the displayed symbols is “Bell winning” or higher, so the rare combination is an internal winning combination during the apocalypse operation. Even if not decided, the player can receive the transfer lottery (A) (D). Therefore, compared to the case where the game state transition lottery is performed based on the rare role, it is possible to give more opportunities to have a feeling of expectation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the operation of the apocalypse ends when the guaranteed number of times becomes 0. However, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), the guaranteed number of times is subtracted at the time of the push order bell winning. Opportunity to receive the transfer lottery (A) (D) will be given for the guaranteed number of times (the player can receive the transfer lottery (A) (D) by answering in the correct order in the opportunity). .. As a result, according to the pachi-slot 1, it is possible to avoid a situation where there is no opportunity to receive the transition lottery (A) (D) during the operation of the apocalypse, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered. it can. Note that, with reference to FIG. 67 (C), the guaranteed number of times is also subtracted when the internal winning combination is “out”. In this respect, the guaranteed number of times may be subtracted only in the case of the push order bell without subtracting the guaranteed number of times in the case of “out”, whereby the above-mentioned effect becomes more clear.

<Effect of CZ>
Pachi-slot 1 has a complete-running CZ as an ART chance zone. In this CZ, although it ends when the transition lottery during the CZ performed during the push-order bell is maintained, even if the transition lottery is performed, if the stop operation is performed in the correct-push order in the push-order bell. , The transfer lottery is invalidated, and CZ continues. With such a CZ, it is possible to receive the lottery for the transition to the ART not only when the push order bell is won, but also when the CZ is completed, so even if the push order bell is not won at all during the CZ, the player does not win. Will be given an opportunity to move to ART, and the interest during CZ can be improved.

  Further, in Pachi-slot 1, since it is decided to give more advantageous privilege (shift to advantageous ART) when the CZ finishes, the player may cancel the shift lottery during the CZ performed at the time of pushing order bell winning. As a result of wanting and as a result, the player is interested in the combination of the displayed symbols, and the interest in each game during CZ can be improved. Also, for the player, the player wants to complete a more advantageous CZ, so that the interest in the CZ can be maintained until the end.

  Further, in the pachi-slot 1, invalid points are given during the CZ, and as long as the invalid points remain, the transfer lottery during the CZ is invalidated. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of receiving a more advantageous transition lottery at the time of completing the CZ, and improve the interest during the CZ.

  In addition, the pachi-slot 1 is provided with a plurality of CZ modes with different expectations for winning the transfer lottery during the CZ, and only upgrades the CZ mode according to the number of continuous games in the CZ. As a result, in Pachi-slot 1, since the degree of expectation of ART transition increases as the CZ continues, the player becomes strongly interested in the combination of the symbols displayed in the CZ, and the interest in the CZ is increased. Can be improved.

  In addition, in the pachi-slot 1, when the invalid points remain, an effect is suggested or informed of the current CZ mode. As a result, the player can grasp or infer to what extent the CZ has continued to be advantageous, and thus the interest in the CZ can be improved. The effect of suggesting or notifying the current CZ mode may be performed regardless of the invalid point. That is, the pachi-slot 1 may perform a predetermined effect by comparing the number of games to be switched from the CZ mode 0 defined in CZ_MAP to the CA mode 1 with the number of continuous games of CZ up to the present.

<Effect of BB mode in bonus state>
The pachi-slot 1 is provided with a plurality of BB modes with different expectations for winning the lottery for transitioning to the ART in the bonus state, and during the bonus state, the BB mode is upgraded based on the internal winning combination. Since the probability of winning the lottery for transition to ART is changed based on the internal winning combination in the bonus state in this way, the player has a strong interest in the internal winning combination in each game in the bonus state. , It is possible to increase the interest in the bonus state.

  In particular, in Pachi-slot 1, in the BB mode with a low expectation of winning the transition lottery, the BB mode is upgraded with a lot of winning combinations, while in the BB mode with a high expectation of winning the transition lottery, a small number of winning combinations. Only BB mode can be upgraded. As a result, as the BB mode is upgraded, the types of winning combinations that are upgraded to the higher BB mode are reduced, but as the BB mode is upgraded, the expectation of winning the transition lottery is increased, and thus the gaming state is gradually increased. You can create a game form that is upgraded to. For the player, instead of being interested in a single game result in the bonus state, he / she is interested in a series of game results in the bonus state, thereby increasing interest in the bonus state. You can

  It should be noted that the BB mode may be upgraded one step at a time, or a plurality of steps may be upgraded at one time. If you control so that you can upgrade only one step at a time, compared to the case where you can upgrade multiple steps at once, the expectation while staying in the BB mode with a lower expectation of winning the transition lottery decreases, Since it is easy to upgrade from the mode, it is easy to create a game mode in which the game state is gradually upgraded.

  Also, in Pachi-slot 1, when a JAC2-based replay or a JAC3-based replay is determined as an internal winning combination in the bonus state, it is treated as “Chanrip” according to the type of carryover combination carried over as an internal winning combination. There are cases where it is handled as replay (see FIG. 81). Then, the BB mode is upgraded when it is treated as "Chanlip", and the BB mode is not upgraded when treated as "Replay". Thereby, the game in the bonus state can be diversified, and the interest in the bonus state can be enhanced.

<Effect of enemy decision ART>
In Pachi-slot 1, a boss ball is set in the apocalypse during the enemy determination ART, and the enemy character to compete in the battle ART is determined according to the type of the boss ball set at the time of winning the push order bell. Then, during the battle ART, the HP reduction amount of the teammate character and the HP reduction amount of the enemy character are changed according to the type of the enemy character. As a result, the result of the game during the enemy decision ART affects whether or not the ART game state is continued, so that the player's interest in continuing the ART game state can be maintained over a plurality of games. it can.

  Further, in Pachi-slot 1, since both the attack power and the defense power are set for the enemy character, both the reduction amount of HP of the ally character and the reduction amount of HP of the enemy character are individually set for each enemy character. Can be set. As a result, it is possible to employ various types of enemy characters such as an enemy character having both high attack power and defense power, an enemy character having only one of them having high power, and an enemy character having both having low power. It is possible to diversify the game during the battle ART according to the result of the game.

  Further, in the pachi-slot 1, the speed is also set for the enemy character, and the frequency with which the enemy character attacks during the battle ART is determined based on the speed set for the enemy character. Thereby, the game during the battle ART can be further diversified according to the result of the game during the enemy determination ART.

  In Pachi-slot 1, the HP of the teammate character is added during the enemy determination ART. If a lot of additions are made by this, it becomes easier to avoid that the HP of the teammate character becomes 0 during the battle ART, and the expectation level for the ART game state to continue increases. Become. As a result, not only the game during the battle ART but also the game during the enemy determination ART will affect the continuation of the ART gaming state. Therefore, the player's interest in the continuation of the ART gaming state is increased by playing the game a plurality of times. It can last for a long time.

  In Pachi-slot 1, if the HP of the teammate character becomes less than the initial value during the enemy determination ART, the HP of the teammate character is set to the initial value. As a result, the HP of the teammate character becomes at least the initial value or more in the subsequent battle ART, so that the HP of the teammate character can be prevented from immediately becoming 0 during the battle ART, and as a result, the continuous advantageous ART state can be immediately obtained. It can be prevented from ending.

  Further, in the pachi-slot 1, the HP of the teammate character in the enemy determination ART is added according to the type of the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. As a result, for example, when the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the additional amount can be increased, so that the rare combination is not wasteful and the interest during the enemy determination ART is improved. You can

<Effect of Battle ART>
In the pachi-slot 1, an enemy ball or a teammate ball is set in the apocalypse during the battle ART, and the HP of the enemy character or the teammate character is decreased depending on the type of the effect ball set at the time of winning the push order bell. Then, if the HP of the enemy character becomes 0 before the HP of the teammate character becomes 0, the ART is continued, and if the HP of the teammate character becomes 0 first, the ART is ended. Here, since the internal winning combination is determined in accordance with the player's start operation, the player actively participates in the game during the battle ART, and the motivation for the game can be improved. ..

  Further, the target for reducing the HP according to the push order bell differs depending on the effect ball set in the apocalypse. Here, in the apocalypse, the effect balls up to multiple destinations are set, so the player can play the game after grasping the set effect balls, an advantageous timing for the player side. You will want to win the push order bell. As a result, the effect ball and the player's start operation can be strongly linked, and the player can play the game with a sense of tension, so that the interest during the battle ART can be improved.

  Further, since the push order combination that reduces HP is a winning combination to be notified during the battle ART, the determination of the push order bell as the internal winning combination affects the profit given during the battle ART. It will be. For example, depending on the game machine, the winning combination that reduces the HP of the teammate character may be replayed, and the winning combination that reduces the HP of the enemy character may be set as the push order bell. However, in such a gaming machine, the presence or absence of a winning combination that affects profits is directly linked to the continuation of ART, and the game becomes monotonous. In this respect, like Pachi-slot 1, by making the winning of the push order bell that influences profits advantageous or disadvantageous according to the effect ball that is set, diversify the game during the battle ART It is possible to enhance the interest in the battle ART.

  In Pachi-slot 1, when a so-called rare combination is won, the HP of the enemy character is reduced regardless of the effect balls that are set. As a result, it is possible to prevent waste of the rare role, and the player expects that the rare role will be determined as an internal winning combination during the battle ART, thereby enhancing the interest during the battle ART. You can

  Also, in Pachi-slot 1, if four enemy balls have been set in succession during the battle ART, the ally ball is always set next. As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation that is unfavorable to the player from continuing for a long period of time, so that the player can play the game during the battle ART with peace of mind.

[Modification]
The pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  In the pachi-slot of the above-mentioned embodiment, when the effect ball is set in the apocalypse, the internal winning combination is set to "Bell winning" or more, or the combination of the displayed symbols is "Bell winning" or more, and is set. The lottery etc. will be performed based on the effect balls. In this respect, when the effect balls are set in the apocalypse, lottery based on the effect balls may be performed regardless of the internal winning combination and the combination of the displayed symbols. In such a pachi-slot, the game balance can be adjusted by adjusting the frequency of setting a blank (empty) in the apocalypse.

  In the pachi-slot of the above-described embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 manages transition control to an advantageous state (for example, “ART state”), manages the duration of the advantageous state, and notifies (navigation) performed during the advantageous state. Although management is performed, one or all of these controls may be performed in the main control circuit 41.

  The transition control to the advantageous state includes, for example, control regarding transition / non-transition to the advantageous state (transition lottery). Further, for example, in the case of the pachi-slot 1 in which a plurality of states having different winning probabilities are provided in the lottery for shifting to the advantageous state, control regarding transition between the states can be included in the control for shifting to the advantageous state.

  Further, the management of the duration of the advantageous state is control relating to increase / decrease in HP of the enemy character and the ally character in the above embodiment, and in the case of other pachi-slots, for example, the number of initial games in the advantageous state is set. The determination and the addition control of the number of AT games are included. Further, for example, in the case of the pachi-slot 1 in which the advantageous state continues with a predetermined probability, lottery as to whether or not to continue can also be included in the management of the duration of the advantageous state.

  As the duration of the advantageous state, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the number of unit games during the advantageous state, the number of times information that is advantageous to the player is notified during the advantageous state, and the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state. It is possible to include an arbitrary period such as the number of sets when the predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) is one set.

  At this time, as the number of medals awarded in the advantageous state, a net increase in number obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out in the same game may be used. Further, the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state may be calculated based on the medals actually increased during the advantageous state (calculation based on the actual value), and regardless of whether or not the medals are actually increased. , May be calculated based on the number of medals expected to increase when the navigation is followed (calculation by an ideal value). Further, the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state may not be increased depending on the type of internal winning combination. For example, with respect to some of the winning combinations that are unlikely to be determined as internal winning combinations, or for the winning combinations in which the combination of symbols is displayed / hidden depending on the timing of the stop operation, the winning combinations have been determined as internal winning combinations. However, the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state may not be increased or decreased.

  In addition, management of notification (navigation) performed in the advantageous state includes control for notifying a mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player by the liquid crystal display device 10 or the like.

  In addition, as a mode of the stop operation informing the player, the order of the stop operations (pushing order) in which a combination of symbols advantageous to the player is displayed may be displayed, and the combination of the symbols is displayed. It may be the timing of the stop operation necessary for that purpose (the pattern to be aimed at).

  In addition, as an advantageous state, the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to the re-play is not changed (or changed within a range that does not affect the game play), and the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is set. A so-called “AT” may be used to notify, and a re-play high probability state (replay time) in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to the re-play becomes high, and a stop operation advantageous for the player It is also possible to use a so-called “ART” that informs the mode.

  In addition, in the pachi-slot of the above-described embodiment or the above-described various modifications, an effect determined with a predetermined probability according to the internal winning combination determined by the main control circuit 41, that is, one or a plurality of effects for one internal winning combination. Are going to do. In this respect, the display (notification) uniquely corresponding to the internal winning combination determined by the main control circuit 41 may be performed together with the effect. Specifically, the display corresponding to the determined internal winning combination on a one-to-one basis may be performed on the above-described 7-segment display 6 or a display unit (not shown) for displaying the internal winning combination. The display of the internal winning combination is preferably performed under the control of the main control circuit 41. In this way, the main control circuit 41 itself announces the internal winning combination determined by the main control circuit 41, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that ensures fairness.

[Appendix 1]
Pachi-slot 1 in Appendix 1 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). According to the gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, the number of gaming media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform the navigation. We hope that the number of navigation games) will increase.

  Further, in recent years, triggered by a predetermined condition, a high-probability replay state (RT) in which a probability that a replay (replay) that can be played without inserting medals is determined as an internal winning combination is high A game machine that operates is also known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-204875 discloses a gaming machine that activates a high-probability replay state when the bonus state ends.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
According to the gaming machine of the patent document, since the high-probability replay state operates after the bonus ends, it is possible to play the game without reducing the medals after the bonus ends, but the high-probability replay state always occurs after the bonus ends. , There is a possibility that the game during the bonus becomes monotonous. Therefore, in the gaming machine that operates the high-probability replay state after the bonus ends, there is a demand for a mechanism in which the game during the bonus does not become monotonous.

  The present invention has been made in view of such demands, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game in a special gaming state.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are displayed (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), and a symbol display means for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels (for example, , The display window 4), the start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the main control circuit 41, the start switch 16S), and the reel is rotated based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Symbol changing means (for example, the main control circuit 41, stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R) that changes the symbol by doing the normal state and a special game that is a game state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state. An internal lottery table provided corresponding to a plurality of game states including a state (for example, a bonus state) and a predetermined state as a trigger to switch the game state Based on the change means (for example, the main control circuit 41) and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the internal lottery table corresponding to the current game state is referred to, and the internal winning combination is selected from a plurality of combinations. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 41) for determining and a stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. 41, stop switch 17S), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, thereby stopping the rotation of the reel. The reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 41) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, and the reel stop control means Whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means is won based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol displaying means when the variation of the symbol is stopped The internal lottery table provided with the winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 41) for determining the internal lottery winning combination determining means is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means. During the special game state, any of a plurality of carry-over combinations (for example, F_JACIN1 to 3) that can be carried over as an internal winning combination can be determined as an internal winning combination until the winning determination means determines that a prize has been won. In the special game state, when the first carryover combination (for example, F_JACIN1) of the plurality of carryover combinations is carried over as an internal winning combination, When a predetermined winning combination (for example, F_J1 upper 7 reps to F_J1 cross 7 rep) is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, a privilege (for example, winning for the ART transition lottery) is given, and the first carryover combination. If a second carryover combination (for example, F_JACIN2) different from the above is carried over as an internal winning combination and the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the privilege granting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) that does not grant the privilege ), Is further provided.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention can carry over any of the plurality of carryover combinations as an internal winning combination during the special game state. Then, the game machine according to the present invention, when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, gives the privilege when the first carryover combination is carried over, and does not give the privilege when the second carryover combination is carried over. .. As a result, even if the predetermined winning combination is won internally, it is possible to change whether or not the privilege is given according to the type of carryover combination, so that it is possible to diversify the game in the special gaming state. , The interest of the game during the special game state can be enhanced.

[Appendix 2]
Pachi-slot 1 in Appendix 2 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which information that is advantageous to the player is notified with a high probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination It is also common to realize an advantageous state (ART) that is advantageous to the player by performing the operation in (1).

  By the way, in the gaming machine having the ART function, even if the transition to the advantageous state is not decided, the operation in the high probability re-gaming state may be performed by the stop operation of the player. In this regard, according to the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-233721), when the transition to the advantageous state is not decided, the information which is advantageous to the player is not notified during the high probability re-play state, and It is described that control is performed to fall from the probability replay state to the normal state.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
Here, the control to fall from the high-probability replay state to the normal state when the transition to the advantageous state is not determined is used as a so-called penalty, and happens to be the high-probability replay state by the player's stop operation. It was general that the lottery itself for shifting to the advantageous state is not performed when the operation of.

  However, even if the gaming state is the high-probability re-gaming state, if the lottery for shifting to the advantageous state is not performed, the high-probability re-gaming state in which the privilege is not given (for example, RT in non-winning ART) It lacks the fun of (middle).

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of a game to which no privilege is given.

[Means for solving the problem]

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, there is a low probability that a replay related to a replay will be determined as an internal winning combination (for example, an RT0 gaming state or an RT1 gaming state) and a probability that the replay is determined as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine having a higher RT state (for example, RT4 gaming state) higher than the normal state, wherein a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed and the reels Symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the displayed symbols, start operation detection means (for example, main control circuit 41, start switch 16S) for detecting a start operation by the player, On the basis of the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means, the symbol changing means for changing the symbol by rotating the reel (for example, the main control circuit 41, the step Motors 61L, 61C, 61R), and a first symbol combination (for example, RT4 transition lip) according to the order of the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means. Alternatively, the second symbol combination (for example, RT1 transition lip) can be stopped and displayed as the first push forward combination (for example, push forward lip), and the third depending on the order of the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined. And a fourth symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols displayed at the time of pressing order correct answer) of the second pressing forward combination (for example, pressing order bell) is included. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 41) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations with a predetermined probability, and a stop provided to correspond to the plurality of reels and for stopping each reel. Operation Stop operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 41, the stop switch 17S) for detecting the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stopping operation detecting means. Based on the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 41) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel, and the reel stop control means Judgment means (for example, the main control circuit 41) for judging the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line provided on the symbol display means based on the stop of the fluctuation, and the judgment during the normal state. It is determined that the first symbol combination among the first symbol combination and the second symbol combination corresponding to the first pushing combination is stopped by means. When determined, the RT starting means (for example, the main control circuit 41) for shifting the game state from the normal state to the high RT state, and the second pushing forward combination by the determining means during the high RT state When it is determined that the third symbol combination among the third symbol combination and the fourth symbol combination according to has stopped, the game state is shifted from the high RT state to the normal state, and the third symbol combination is stopped. When it is determined that the symbol combination of 4 has stopped, the RT ending means (for example, the main control circuit 41) for maintaining the high RT state and a predetermined lottery (for example, the main state control circuit 41) performed during the normal state or the high RT state (for example, , If the winning of the transfer lottery to ART is won, a specific production state transition means (for example, a sub-control) for transitioning the production state regarding the game to a specific production state (for example, the ART game state) that informs information of advantageous stop operation When the RT starting means shifts the game state to the high RT state in a state of not winning the predetermined lottery, the second push forward combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Notification number determining means (for example, sub-control) for determining the number of times of notification (for example, the guaranteed number of times) for notifying the information (for example, the pressing order of the correct answer to the pressing order bell) of the stop operation necessary to stop the symbol combination of 4 When the circuit 42) and the specific effect state transition means move to the specific effect state, the first symbol combination is stopped when the first pushing forward combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the normal state. In addition to notifying the information of the stop operation necessary to do so, the information of the advantageous stop operation is notified during the high RT state, and the second push is performed during the high RT state of non-winning in the predetermined lottery. The normal win is the internal win And a notification unit (for example, the sub-control circuit 42, the liquid crystal display device 10) that notifies the information of the stop operation advantageous only for the number of notifications determined by the notification number determination unit. ..

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, there are a normal state in which a replay related to a replay is determined as an internal winning combination and a high RT state in which a replay is determined as an internal winning combination is high and a high RT state. By informing the information of the advantageous stop operation in the specific effect state inside, it is possible to realize the advantageous game state (so-called ART) for the player. Here, since the transition to the specific effect state is performed not only by the predetermined lottery performed in the normal state but also by winning the predetermined lottery performed in the high RT state, the predetermined lottery is won. Even in the case of shifting to the high RT state in the absence state, it can be expected to shift to the specific effect state thereafter. As a result, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to set a high RT state which is not won in a predetermined lottery as a chance opportunity section to shift to an advantageous gaming state (so-called ART), and a privilege is given. There is no (not winning the predetermined lottery), the interest in the high RT state can be enhanced.

  Further, since the predetermined lottery is carried out during the high RT state, the strategic characteristic for the stop operation during the normal state is increased, and the interest during the normal state can be enhanced. That is, as in the conventional gaming machine, in the game property that a penalty is imposed during the high RT state in which the privilege is not given, the stop operation in the normal state is simple (for example, the first stop operation is performed so as not to receive the penalty). I have to do it for the left reel). In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined lottery is performed without imposing a penalty during the high RT state, so that the player can freely perform the stop operation during the normal state, and Not only playability but also operability can be improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the third symbol combination corresponding to the second push combination is stopped during the high RT state, the high RT state is ended and the game state is shifted to the normal state, but the predetermined When shifting to a high RT state in a state where the lottery is not won, information on advantageous stop operation (for example, when the second push forward combination is determined as an internal winning combination, it is necessary to stop the fourth symbol combination). Information of a specific stop operation) is notified a predetermined number of times. As a result, if the player shifts to the high RT state accidentally by the stop operation, the player will not immediately shift from the high RT state to the normal state, and will receive a predetermined lottery in a state where the winning probability of the replay is high. be able to.

[Appendix 3]
Pachi-slot 1 in Appendix 3 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which information that is advantageous to the player is notified with a high probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination It is also common to realize an advantageous state (ART) that is advantageous to the player by performing the operation in (1).

  By the way, in a gaming machine having an ART function, a chance zone having a high degree of expectation of transition to the ART state is provided, and if a specific condition is satisfied in this chance zone, control is performed so as to transition to the ART state with high probability. .. For example, in Patent Document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-048945), when a specific symbol combination (RT operation symbol 1) is aimed in a chance zone (CZ) and a specific symbol combination is displayed, replay is internally performed. As a winning combination, a gaming machine that performs control to shift to a high RT with a high probability is disclosed.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
In the gaming machine of such patent document, the interest of the player in the chance zone is concentrated on whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed. By the way, whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed depends on the result of the internal lottery. Therefore, depending on the player, an opportunity in which the specific symbol combination may be displayed in the chance zone. May never be obtained, or the chances of such possibility may be extremely small. In such a case, the player may not get any chance, despite the fact that the player has moved to the chance zone, and the interest in the game may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period which is a trigger for shifting to an advantageous state advantageous to a player. The purpose is to

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state, as a state in which a game is played. Then, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And, based on the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the main control circuit 41, the start switch 16S), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, by rotating the reel, the symbol Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern change means (for example, the main control circuit 41, the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R) for changing the , The first symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination displayed at the time of the correct answer in the pushing order) or the second symbol combination (for example, the bell spill) depending on the order of the stop operation when it is determined as the internal winning combination. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 41) that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations including a push-displaying combination that can be stopped and displayed (for example, a pressing-order bell), and the plurality of combinations. Stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 41, stop switch 17S) provided corresponding to the reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. Based on the combination and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means, the rotation of the reel is stopped to stop the fluctuation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. A combination of reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 41) to be made, and the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means. Based on the winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 41, the stop switch 17S) that determines whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means is based on a predetermined condition, A lottery state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) for starting an advantageous state lottery state (for example, CZ) for performing a transition lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous state, and the internal winning combination determination in the advantageous state lottery state. When the pushing forward combination is determined as an internal winning combination by the means, a first transition lottery (for example, in the middle of CZ, which determines with a predetermined probability to shift to the advantageous state) Performing a transition lottery to ART), and when a predetermined number of unit games (for example, 30 games) have passed in the advantageous state lottery state, a second transition lottery (for example, determining a transition to the advantageous state with a specific probability) Advantageous state lottery means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) for performing the lottery for the transition to the ART when the CZ is completed, and the first symbol combination is displayed on the effective line in the unit game where the first transitional lottery is performed. Then, the first transition lottery is invalidated regardless of the transition lottery result to the advantageous state, and when the second symbol combination is displayed on the activated line in the unit game, the first transition lottery. Lottery result management means for maintaining the lottery result (for example, the sub-control circuit 42), and the first transition lottery in the advantageous state lottery state, and the lottery result management means When the lottery result of the first transition lottery is maintained, or when the predetermined number of unit games have passed, the lottery state ending means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) that ends the advantageous state lottery state, and When it is decided to shift to the advantageous state by the first shift lottery or the second shift lottery, advantageous state shift means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) that shifts the state of playing a game to the advantageous state, It is provided that the advantageous state transition means is more advantageous than a case where it is determined by the first transition lottery that the advantageous state is transitioned to the advantageous state by the second transition lottery. It is characterized by shifting to an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state of a more advantageous ART state).

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, in the advantageous state lottery state (chance zone) in which the lottery is shifted to the advantageous state advantageous to the player, the first winning combination is determined as the push winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Transfer lottery. Then, the advantageous state lottery state is finished when the first transition lottery is carried out and the lottery result of the first transition lottery is maintained, or when a predetermined number of unit games have passed. In the gaming machine that performs the lottery transition to the advantageous state based on the internal winning combination as described above, some players may not be able to receive the first transition lottery during the advantageous state lottery state at all. In the gaming machine, the second transfer lottery is carried out when a predetermined number of unit games have passed in the advantageous state lottery state. As a result, even if the push winning combination is not determined as the internal winning combination in the advantageous state lottery state, it is possible to receive the transition lottery to the advantageous state without fail, so that the interest in the advantageous state lottery state can be improved. ..

  Further, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the first lottery is performed when the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, but when the first symbol combination is displayed as a result of the stop operation, the first transfer lottery is performed. When the second symbol combination is displayed, the result of the first transfer lottery is maintained. According to such control, the player will be interested in the symbol combination displayed in the game in which the push winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, so that the interest in each game in the advantageous state lottery state Can be improved. In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the advantageous state of transitioning through the second transition lottery is an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the advantageous state of transitioning through the first transition lottery, so the player has the second symbol. A combination is displayed (the first transition lottery is maintained and the advantageous state lottery state is not ended), and it is desired that a predetermined number of unit games be passed, and the interest in the advantageous state lottery state can be maintained to the end. it can.

[Appendix 4]
Pachi-slot 1 in Appendix 4 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which information that is advantageous to the player is notified with a high probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination It is also common to realize an advantageous state (ART) that is advantageous to the player by performing the operation in (1).

  In addition, various measures have been taken so far to diversify the trigger for shifting to the advantageous state (ART). For example, in Patent Document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-126369), a specific combination (7 in BB) during a bonus is disclosed. A game machine is disclosed in which, if an internal winning is given to (matching), the state shifts to an advantageous state after the bonus ends.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems that Ming tries to solve]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the transition lottery to the advantageous state is performed based on one internal lottery result during the predetermined period (during the bonus), the game tends to be monotonous, and the expectation about the transition to the advantageous state. There was a problem that it was hard to hold. In addition, since the winning probability of the specific combination that triggers the transition to the advantageous state is generally suppressed to a low level, it is not possible to have the expectation of winning within a predetermined period, and the transition to the advantageous state is triggered. There is also a possibility that the interest of the game for a predetermined period may be spoiled.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period which is a trigger for shifting to an advantageous state advantageous to a player. The purpose is to

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state, as a state in which a game is played. Then, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And, based on the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the main control circuit 41, the start switch 16S), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, by rotating the reel, the symbol Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern change means (for example, the main control circuit 41, the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R) for changing the , An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 41) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations with a predetermined probability, and a unit provided corresponding to the plurality of reels for stopping each reel. Stop operation detection means for detecting a stop operation (for example, the main control circuit 41, stop switch 17S), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means Based on the above, reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 41) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel, and the reel stop control means When the variation of the symbols is stopped, based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol display means, the internal winning combination determiner Whether or not to shift to the advantageous state by a winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 41) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by The advantageous state lottery state (for example, a bonus state) in which the transition lottery is performed is started, and the advantageous state lottery is triggered by a specific condition in the advantageous state lottery state (for example, that 59 medals are paid out). When the game state control means for ending the state (for example, the main control circuit 41) and the game state control means end the advantageous state lottery state, the advantageous state lottery means for randomly determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous state ( For example, if the winning of the sub-control circuit 42) and the lottery of the advantageous state lottery means is won, the advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub-control) that shifts the state of playing the game to the advantageous state Circuit 42), and the advantageous state lottery state is a first lottery state (for example, BB mode 0) in which the probability of winning the transition lottery by the advantageous state lottery means is lowest, and the probability is the first lottery. A plurality of second lottery states (for example, BB mode 1) higher than the state, and a third lottery state (for example, BB mode 2) in which the probability is higher than the first lottery state and the second lottery state It has a lottery state (for example, BB mode), and in the advantageous state lottery state, based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means, a lottery state transition means (for example, a transition of the plurality of lottery states) A sub control circuit 42) is further provided, and the lottery state transition means is an internal winning combination of a first number combination of the first combination and the second combination of the plurality of combinations in the first random determination state. Determined Then, the lottery state is transited from the first lottery state to the second lottery state, and in the second lottery state, the first combination of the plurality of combinations and the second combination not included When any of the second numbers smaller than the number is determined as the internal winning combination, the gaming state is changed from the second lottery state to the third lottery state.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, at the end of the advantageous state lottery state, transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous state. At this time, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of lottery states including a first lottery state, a second lottery state, and a third lottery state with different probabilities of winning the transfer lottery, and the inside of the advantageous state lottery state. A plurality of lottery states are transitioned based on the winning combination. As a result, the probability of winning the transfer lottery based on the internal winning combination can be changed, so that the player has a strong interest in the internal winning combination in each game in the advantageous state lottery state. The interest in the state lottery state can be enhanced.

  In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the second lottery state in which the probability of winning the transition lottery from the first lottery state is higher, one of the first winning combinations including the first winning combination and the second winning combination is internally won. When determined as a winning combination, a transition is made, and from the second random determination state to the third random determination state in which there is a higher probability of winning the transition random determination, the second number that is smaller than the first number that includes the first combination and does not include the second combination Transition is made when any of the winning combinations is determined as an internal winning combination. As a result, as the lottery state transitions, the types of roles that trigger the transition to a higher lottery state will decrease, but the probability of winning the transition lottery along with the transition of the lottery state also increases, so the game It is possible to create a game mode in which the state is gradually upgraded. For the player, instead of being interested in one internal lottery result in the advantageous state lottery state, they are interested in a series of internal lottery results in the advantageous state lottery state, The interest in the lottery state can be enhanced.

[Appendix 5]
Pachi-slot 1 in Appendix 5 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which information that is advantageous to the player is notified with a high probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination It is also common to realize an advantageous state (ART) that is advantageous to the player by performing the operation in (1).

  By the way, since the game in the advantageous state tends to be monotonous, in recent years, attempts to diversify the game characteristics in the advantageous state have been widely made. For example, in a patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-152165), a free game is executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the number of fighter symbols stopped and displayed as a result of the free game is displayed on a liquid crystal display. There is disclosed a gaming machine having a variety of effects and payout forms by setting the remaining number of fighters on the player side of the shooting game displayed in the above effect.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the free game and the effect (shooting game) are automatically advanced under the control of the gaming machine side, the progress of the game by the player cannot be reflected in the effect contents. , The player could not actively participate in the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game in an advantageous state by allowing the player to actively participate in the game. The purpose is to

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state advantageous for the player as compared with the normal state (for example, a battle ART in the ART gaming state) as a state in which a game is played. A gaming machine, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Rotating the reel based on the window 4), start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the main control circuit 41, start switch 16S), and the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means. By means of the symbol changing means (for example, the main control circuit 41, the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R) for changing the symbol by the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of, the internal winning combination determination means (for example, the main control circuit 41) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability, and each reel provided corresponding to the plurality of reels. The stop operation detecting means for detecting the stop operation for stopping (for example, the main control circuit 41, the stop switch 17S), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stop operation are detected by the stop operation detecting means. Based on the detected timing, reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 41) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel, and the reel stop When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the control means, based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol display means, the internal A winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 41) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determination means has won, and an advantageous state starting means for starting the advantageous state with a predetermined condition as a trigger. (For example, the sub-control circuit 42), and when a predetermined winning combination (for example, the pushing order bell) is determined as an internal winning combination in the advantageous state, information on the stop operation advantageous for the player (for example, a large number of payout symbols) Notification information (for example, the sub-control circuit 42, the liquid crystal display device 10) for notifying the combination of (1) and first numerical information (for example, HP of a teammate character) prior to the start of the advantageous state. And numerical value determining means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) for determining the second numerical value information (for example, the HP of the enemy character), and during the advantageous state, from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead. Performance information registration means (for example, sub-control circuit 42) for registering performance information (for example, a performance ball) in a plurality of games (for example, set in an apocalypse displayed on the liquid crystal display device 10), and as the performance information. When the predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which the first effect information (for example, enemy ball) is registered, the first predetermined value is subtracted from the first numerical value information, and as the effect information. When the predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which the second effect information (for example, a ally ball) is registered, a numerical value updating unit (for example, a subordinate) for subtracting a second predetermined value from the second numerical information. As a result of the subtraction of the control circuit 42) and the numerical value updating means, the advantageous state is ended when the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold value, and the advantageous state is updated when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value. Advantageously state control means (e.g., the sub-control circuit 42) for starting to the, characterized in that it comprises a.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information are subtracted based on the effect information and the internal winning combination during the advantageous state, and the second numerical value is decreased before the first numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value. When the numerical information can be made less than the threshold value, the advantageous state is continued. Here, since the internal winning combination is determined in accordance with the player's start operation, the player actively participates in the game in the advantageous state, and the motivation for the game can be improved. ..

  Further, even when the predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the target to be subtracted (first numerical value information or second numerical value information) is different depending on the effect information registered in the game. For the player, since the first numerical value information is subtracted in the state where the first effect information is registered, the player does not want to win the predetermined combination, and conversely, when the second effect information is registered. Wants to win the predetermined role. Here, since the effect information is registered for a plurality of times of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead, the player can play the game after grasping the effect information registered in advance, The player wants to win the predetermined combination at an advantageous timing (the second effect information is registered). As a result, the registered effect information and the player's start operation can be strongly linked, and the player can play the game with a sense of tension, so that the interest in the advantageous state can be improved. it can.

  Further, since the predetermined winning combination for subtracting the first numerical value information or the second numerical information is the notification target winning combination, the determination of the predetermined winning combination as the internal winning combination has an effect on the profit given during the advantageous state. Will be given. For example, depending on the gaming machine, the winning combination for which the first numerical value information is subtracted is the first winning combination (replay, etc.) that does not affect the profit, and the winning combination for which the second numerical value information is subtracted is the first winning combination that affects the profit. It is also possible to use two roles (bell etc.). In such a gaming machine, the presence or absence of the winning of the second role affecting profits is directly linked to the continuation of the advantageous state, and the game becomes monotonous. In this respect, like the gaming machine according to the present invention, by making the winning of the predetermined winning combination that affects profits advantageous / disadvantageous according to the registered performance information, the gaming property in the advantageous state is improved. It can be diversified and the interest in an advantageous state can be enhanced.

[Appendix 6]
Pachi-slot 1 in Appendix 6 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which information that is advantageous to the player is notified with a high probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination It is also common to realize an advantageous state (ART) that is advantageous to the player by performing the operation in (1).

  By the way, in a gaming machine having a plurality of gaming states, it is common to shift the gaming state based on winning or winning of a so-called rare combination such as watermelon or cherry. For example, in the patent document (JP 2013-048945 A), the RT operation symbols 1 and 2 displayed when the cherries 1, 2 and 3 are determined as the internal winning combination are displayed during a predetermined period. Therefore, it is disclosed that the game state is shifted to a game state advantageous to the player. Here, since the internal winning combination is determined according to the player's start operation, the operation of the player is reflected in the result of the game by shifting the game state based on the result of the internal lottery as in the patent document. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game feature in which the player actively participates in the game.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, since so-called rare roles such as watermelons and cherries have a low winning probability, when a game state is changed depending on whether or not a rare role is won like a gaming machine of a patent document, some players even once during the period. There is a possibility that you may not get a chance, and there is a risk that the interest in the game will decline.

  On the other hand, although it is possible to consider the game playability of shifting the game state regardless of the operation of the player, in such a game machine, apart from the original game playability of the pachi-slot machine that progresses the game according to the operation of the player. Since the decision to affect the profit to be given is made, the pachi-slot machine is not suitable and the fairness of the game may be impaired.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of shifting to a gaming state rich in amusement while being associated with a result of a game.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention, as a state in which a game is played, has an advantageous state (eg, ART gaming state) advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state (eg, normal gaming state) and the normal state, and the normal state. A gaming machine having a chance zone (for example, CZ) with a high probability of shifting to the advantageous state, and a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and the reel Symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on, and start operation detection means (for example, main control circuit 41, start switch 16S) for detecting a start operation by the player, , A symbol changing means for changing the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means (for example, a main control circuit 41, a stepper) Based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the first symbol combination (for example, when the pressing order is correct) in accordance with the order of the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined. A combination of displayed symbols) or a second symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols displayed when the pushing order is incorrect) among a plurality of winning combinations including a pushing order winning combination (for example, pushing order bell) From the internal winning combination determination means (for example, the main control circuit 41) that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability, and a stop that is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detects a stop operation for stopping each reel. A stop operation is detected by the operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 41, the stop switch 17S), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stop operation detecting means. Based on the timing, the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 41) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel, and the reel stop control means. Whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means is won based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol displaying means when the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped. If a winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 41) that determines whether or not a predetermined condition (for example, winning of the apocalypse random determination) is satisfied in the normal state, a CZ random determination state in which the transfer lottery to the chance zone is performed (for example, , A normal game state during apocalypse operation), a lottery state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) for starting, and a predetermined number of times from the current game during the CZ lottery state. The effect information registration means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) for registering effect information (for example, effect balls such as lottery balls 1 to 4 and confirmed balls) in a plurality of times of games up to a game ahead, and the effect information are When the first symbol combination is displayed on the activated line in the registered game, the CZ lottery for performing the transfer lottery to the chance zone with a probability according to the effect information registered for the game. Based on the means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42, the ART lottery table during reel stop in FIG. 72) and the result of the transfer lottery of the CZ lottery means, the game state control means for shifting the game state to the chance zone (for example, With the sub-control circuit 42), when the pushing forward combination is determined as an internal winning combination a predetermined number of times during the CZ random determination state (for example, when the guaranteed number of times becomes 0), the CZ random determination state is ended. To lottery state ending means (e.g., the sub-control circuit 42) and, characterized in that it comprises a.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the gaming state is shifted from the CZ lottery state to the chance zone based on the effect information registered in advance for a predetermined number of games including the current game. Here, since the effect information is registered regardless of the operation of the player, simply changing the game state based on the effect information would impair suitability as a gaming machine and impair the fairness of the game. There is a risk that In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, not only the effect information registered for each game but also the combination of the symbols displayed in the game is taken into account to shift the game state. Thereby, the player's operation can be intervened in the transition of the game state, and the fairness of the game can be ensured.

  Here, the first symbol combination that triggers the transition of the game state is a combination of symbols displayed when the push forward combination is determined as the internal winning combination, so the rare combination described above is transferred to the game state. It is possible to give the player more opportunities to have a sense of expectation regarding the game state transition, as compared with the case of using the opportunity. In other words, in the first symbol combination that requires not only winning as an internal winning combination but also the order of stop operations, it is possible to set the winning probability higher than that of the rare winning combination, so that there is an opportunity to have an expectation (press It is possible to give a lot of normal winning combinations as internal winning combinations) and improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the game state transition lottery is performed with a probability according to the effect information registered for the game in which the first symbol combination is displayed, so that the player's operation is possible. The game state can be changed in various modes while being associated with the result of the accompanying game. As a result, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to perform the transition of the gaming state in a mode rich in game play while being associated with the result of the game.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the CZ lottery state is ended when the push winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination a predetermined number of times during the CZ lottery state. In this way, by using the pushing forward combination that triggers the transition of the game state as the ending condition of the CZ lottery state, the player is given a predetermined number of opportunities to receive the transition lottery during the CZ lottery state. As a result, it is possible for the player to avoid a situation where there is no opportunity to receive the transfer lottery, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

[Appendix 7]
Pachi-slot 1 in Appendix 7 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which information that is advantageous to the player is notified with a high probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination It is also common to realize an advantageous state (ART) that is advantageous to the player by performing the operation in (1).

  By the way, in a gaming machine having an ART function, a chance zone having a high degree of expectation of transition to the ART state is provided, and if a specific condition is satisfied in this chance zone, control is performed so as to transition to the ART state with high probability. .. For example, in Patent Document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-048945), when a specific symbol combination (RT operation symbol 1) is aimed in a chance zone (CZ) and a specific symbol combination is displayed, replay is internally performed. As a winning combination, a gaming machine that performs control to shift to a high RT with a high probability is disclosed.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
In the gaming machine of such patent document, the interest of the player in the chance zone is concentrated on whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed. By the way, whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed depends on the result of the internal lottery. Therefore, depending on the player, an opportunity in which the specific symbol combination may be displayed in the chance zone. May never be obtained, or the chances of such possibility may be extremely small. In such a case, the player may not get any chance, despite the fact that the player has moved to the chance zone, and the interest in the game may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period which is a trigger for shifting to an advantageous state advantageous to a player. The purpose is to

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state, as a state in which a game is played. Then, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And, based on the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the main control circuit 41, the start switch 16S), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, by rotating the reel, the symbol Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern change means (for example, the main control circuit 41, the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R) for changing the An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 41) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations with a predetermined probability, and a stop provided to correspond to the plurality of reels and for stopping each reel. Stop operation detecting means for detecting operation (for example, the main control circuit 41, stop switch 17S), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stopping operation detecting means. Based on the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 41) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel, and the symbol by the reel stop control means. When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol display means, the internal winning combination determination means A winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 41) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the above is won, and a transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the advantageous state is triggered by a predetermined condition. Lottery state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) that starts the advantageous state lottery state (for example, CZ), and a winning mode (for example, CZ) that defines the probability of deciding to shift to the advantageous state in the transition lottery. Mode), a mode shift means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) that shifts based on the number of unit games that have passed in the advantageous state lottery state, and a predetermined winning combination by the internal winning combination determination means in the advantageous state lottery state ( For example, when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the advantageous state lottery means (for example, the secondary controller) that performs the transition lottery based on the current winning mode. Control circuit 42) and, when the transition lottery is performed by the advantageous state lottery means, a lottery state ending means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) that ends the advantageous state lottery state and the transition state is brought to the advantageous state by the transition lottery. When it is decided to shift, it is provided with advantageous state shift means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) that shifts the state of playing the game to the advantageous state, and the mode shift means passes in the advantageous state lottery state. Based on the number of unit games played, the first mode with the lowest probability (for example, CZ mode 0) is shifted to the second mode (for example, CZ mode 1) with the higher probability than the first mode, and The third mode (eg, CZ mode 2) having the highest probability when the number of unit games that have passed in the advantageous state lottery state reaches a predetermined number (eg, 30 times). When the lottery state start means starts the advantageous state lottery state, the mode shift means determines the number of unit games to shift from the first mode to the second mode. Transition timing determination means (for example, CZ_MAP). , Sub-control circuit 42) are further provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, in the advantageous state lottery state (chance zone) for performing the transition lottery to the advantageous state advantageous to the player, the transition lottery is triggered by the predetermined winning combination being determined as the internal winning combination. When the transfer lottery is performed, the advantageous state lottery state is ended. Here, in the gaming machine that performs the transition lottery to the advantageous state based on the internal winning combination, some players may not be able to receive the transition lottery during the advantageous state lottery state at all, but the gaming machine according to the present invention Then, as the advantageous state lottery state continues, the winning mode that defines the probability of winning the transition lottery increases, and it becomes easier to win the transition lottery. In such a gaming machine, contrary to the conventional gaming machine, it is advantageous for the player that the predetermined winning combination is not determined as an internal winning combination during the advantageous state lottery state. It is possible to improve the amusement during the advantageous state lottery state by making it possible to make the game playless.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, when the advantageous state lottery state starts, the number of unit games for shifting the winning mode from the first mode to the second mode is determined. As a result, the timing at which the winning mode is increased to the advantageous mode for the player is different for each advantageous state lottery state, so that the game in the advantageous state lottery state can be diversified, and the advantage state lottery state The interest can be improved.

[Appendix 8]
The pachi-slot 1 of Appendix 8 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In addition, a game machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is decided as an internal winning combination is high is also called an ART machine or the like.

  According to the gaming machine equipped with such AT function and ART function, the number of gaming media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform the navigation, so that the player can perform AT or ART. You will want to have a long period of time.

  Therefore, in recent years, ingenuity for increasing the period of AT or ART has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Patent Document (JP 2010-057732A), it is specified that watermelon, cherry, etc. are specified as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games when the winning combination is determined is disclosed. According to this gaming machine, since the number of AT games increases in accordance with the internal winning combination, the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination to play the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, the game playability tends to be monotonous, and the player's expectation for continuing AT or ART is I couldn't sustain the player's expectations, focusing only on one game.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of maintaining the player's interest in maintaining an advantageous state (AT, ART, etc.) over a plurality of games. The purpose is to

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state, as a state in which a game is played. Then, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And, based on the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the main control circuit 41, the start switch 16S), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, by rotating the reel, the symbol Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern change means (for example, the main control circuit 41, the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R) for changing the , An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 41) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations with a predetermined probability, and a unit provided corresponding to the plurality of reels for stopping each reel. Stop operation detection means for detecting a stop operation (for example, the main control circuit 41, stop switch 17S), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means Based on the above, reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 41) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel, and the reel stop control means When the variation of the symbols is stopped, based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol display means, the internal winning combination determiner The winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 41) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the above is determined, and the first advantageous state (for example, enemy determination ART) and the first Advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) for starting the advantageous state including the second advantageous state (for example, battle ART) that is performed subsequent to the first advantageous state, and the progress of the game in the first advantageous state. The first advantageous state control means (for example, the sub control circuit 42) for controlling, and the second advantageous state control means (for example, the sub control circuit 42) for controlling the progress of the game in the second advantageous state are provided, and The first advantageous state control means, during the first advantageous state, first effect information registration means (for example, effect ball) for registering effect information (for example, effect balls) in a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead. , In the game in which any one of a plurality of types of first effect information (for example, boss balls 1 to 8) is registered as the sub control circuit 42) and the effect information, the first advantageous state is ended, and the first advantageous state is ended. The second advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) for starting the two advantageous states, and the second advantageous state control means, during the second advantageous state, a predetermined number of times ahead of the current game. Up to the second effect information registration means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) for registering effect information (for example, effect balls) in the game a plurality of times up to, and second effect information (for example, an enemy ball) is registered as the effect information. From the first numerical value information (for example, HP of the teammate character) in the game being played, the first value information corresponding to the type of the first effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state (for example, the attack power of the enemy character) Subtract one number In addition, in the game in which the third effect information (for example, ally ball) is registered as the effect information, the second numerical value information (for example, the HP of the enemy character) is registered at the end of the first advantageous state in the game. Numerical value subtracting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) for subtracting the second numerical value according to the type of the first effect information (for example, the defense power of the enemy character), and the result of the subtraction by the numerical value subtracting means, the first numerical value. Advantageous state continuation determination means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) that ends the advantageous state when the information becomes less than the threshold value, and newly starts the first advantageous state when the second numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value. It is characterized by being provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value and continues when the second numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value before the first numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value. Here, since the subtraction of the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information is performed based on the effect information registered for each game in the second advantageous state, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state continues for a plurality of games. Will vary depending on the game result. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the player's interest in continuing the advantageous state can be maintained over a plurality of games.

  Further, the effect information for subtracting the numerical value information is registered in advance not only for the current game but also for a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead. For the player, it is possible to grasp the flow of the subsequent game from the contents of the effect information registered in advance up to the game a plurality of times ahead, so that the player is interested not only in the current game but also in the subsequent game. , The interest in the advantageous state can be improved.

  At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the subtraction amount of the numerical information is made to differ depending on the type of the first effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state. As a result, not only the second advantageous state but also the result of the game during the first advantageous state influences whether or not the advantageous state is continued. Therefore, the player's interest in the continuation of the advantageous state is repeated a plurality of times. It can be continued throughout the game. Further, by separately determining the subtraction amount (first numerical value) of the first numerical value information and the subtraction amount (second numerical value) of the second numerical value information, for example, the subtraction amount of the first numerical value information and the subtraction amount of the second numerical value information are both set. The amount of subtraction of the first numerical value information can be increased / decreased, the amount of subtraction of the first numerical value information can be decreased / increased, and the amount of subtraction of the second numerical value information can be decreased / increased. Can be converted. As a result, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the interest in the advantageous state can be improved.

[Appendix 9]
The pachi-slot 1 of Appendix 9 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In addition, a game machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is decided as an internal winning combination is high is also called an ART machine or the like.

  According to the gaming machine equipped with such AT function and ART function, the number of gaming media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform the navigation, so that the player can perform AT or ART. You will want to have a long period of time.

  Therefore, in recent years, ingenuity for increasing the period of AT or ART has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Patent Document (JP 2010-057732A), it is specified that watermelon, cherry, etc. are specified as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games when the winning combination is determined is disclosed. According to this gaming machine, since the number of AT games increases in accordance with the internal winning combination, the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination to play the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, the game playability tends to be monotonous, and the player's expectation for continuing AT or ART is I couldn't sustain the player's expectations, focusing only on one game.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of maintaining the player's interest in maintaining an advantageous state (AT, ART, etc.) over a plurality of games. The purpose is to

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state, as a state in which a game is played. Then, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And, based on the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the main control circuit 41, the start switch 16S), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, by rotating the reel, the symbol Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern change means (for example, the main control circuit 41, the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R) for changing the , An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 41) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations with a predetermined probability, and a unit provided corresponding to the plurality of reels for stopping each reel. Stop operation detection means for detecting a stop operation (for example, the main control circuit 41, stop switch 17S), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means Based on the above, reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 41) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel, and the reel stop control means When the variation of the symbols is stopped, based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol display means, the internal winning combination determiner The winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 41) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the above is determined, and the first advantageous state (for example, enemy determination ART) and the first Advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) for starting the advantageous state including the second advantageous state (for example, battle ART) that is performed subsequent to the first advantageous state, and the progress of the game in the first advantageous state. The first advantageous state control means (for example, the sub control circuit 42) for controlling, and the second advantageous state control means (for example, the sub control circuit 42) for controlling the progress of the game in the second advantageous state are provided, and The first advantageous state control means, during the first advantageous state, first effect information registration means (for example, effect ball) for registering effect information (for example, effect balls) in a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead. , In the game in which the sub-control circuit 42) and the first effect information (for example, ally ball) are registered as the effect information, a numerical value adding means for adding a predetermined number to the first numerical value information (for example, HP of the ally character) ( For example, a second advantage of ending the first advantageous state and starting the second advantageous state in the game in which the sub-control circuit 42) and the second effect information (for example, boss ball) are registered as the effect information. State start means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42), and, the second advantageous state control means, during the second advantageous state, the presentation information in a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead The second numerical value information registration means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) that registers (for example, effect balls), and the first numerical value in the game in which the third effect information (for example, enemy balls) is registered as the effect information. information The second predetermined value is subtracted from the second numerical value information (for example, the HP of the enemy character) in the game in which the fourth performance information (for example, a ally ball) is registered as the performance information. As a result of the subtraction of the numerical subtraction means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) for subtracting, and the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold value, the advantageous state is terminated, and the second numerical information is less than the threshold value. In this case, the advantageous state continuation determination means (for example, the sub control circuit 42) that newly starts the first advantageous state is provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value and continues when the second numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value before the first numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value. Here, since the subtraction of the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information is performed based on the effect information registered for each game in the second advantageous state, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state continues for a plurality of games. Will vary depending on the game result. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the player's interest in continuing the advantageous state can be maintained over a plurality of games.

  Further, the effect information for subtracting the numerical value information is registered in advance not only for the current game but also for a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead. For the player, it is possible to grasp the flow of the subsequent game from the contents of the effect information registered in advance up to the game a plurality of times ahead, so that the player is interested not only in the current game but also in the subsequent game. , The interest in the advantageous state can be improved.

  At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first numerical value information that triggers the end of the advantageous state is added based on the first effect information registered during the first advantageous state. By adding a large amount of the first numerical value information during the first advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the first numerical value information from decreasing below the threshold value in the subsequent second advantageous state. As a result, not only the second advantageous state but also the result of the game during the first advantageous state influences the continuation of the advantageous state. Can be sustained.

[Appendix 10]
The pachi-slot 1 of Appendix 10 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In addition, a game machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is decided as an internal winning combination is high is also called an ART machine or the like.

  According to the gaming machine equipped with such AT function and ART function, the number of gaming media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform the navigation, so that the player can perform AT or ART. You will want to have a long period of time.

  Therefore, in recent years, ingenuity for increasing the period of AT or ART has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Patent Document (JP 2010-057732A), it is specified that watermelon, cherry, etc. are specified as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games when the winning combination is determined is disclosed. According to this gaming machine, since the number of AT games increases in accordance with the internal winning combination, the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination to play the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, the game playability tends to be monotonous, and the player's expectation for continuing AT or ART is I couldn't sustain the player's expectations, focusing only on one game.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of maintaining the player's interest in maintaining an advantageous state (AT, ART, etc.) over a plurality of games. The purpose is to

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state advantageous for the player as compared with the normal state (for example, a battle ART in the ART gaming state) as a state in which a game is played. A gaming machine, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Rotating the reel based on the window 4), start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the main control circuit 41, start switch 16S), and the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means. By means of the symbol changing means (for example, the main control circuit 41, the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R) for changing the symbol by the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of, the internal winning combination determination means (for example, the main control circuit 41) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability, and each reel provided corresponding to the plurality of reels. The stop operation detecting means for detecting the stop operation for stopping (for example, the main control circuit 41, the stop switch 17S), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stop operation are detected by the stop operation detecting means. Based on the detected timing, reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 41) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel, and the reel stop When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the control means, based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol display means, the internal A winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 41) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determination means has won, and an advantageous state starting means for starting the advantageous state with a predetermined condition as a trigger. (For example, the sub-control circuit 42) and a determination unit (first control unit) for determining the first numerical information (for example, the HP of the ally character) and the second numerical information (for example, the HP of the enemy character) prior to the start of the advantageous state. For example, the sub-control circuit 42) and the effect information registration means (for example, the sub-control) for registering effect information (for example, effect balls) in a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead during the advantageous state. Circuit 42) and the first effect information (for example, an enemy ball) is registered as the effect information, the first predetermined value is subtracted from the first numerical value information, and the performance information is the second performance. Numerical value updating means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) that subtracts the second predetermined value from the second numerical value information in the game in which the outgoing information (for example, ally ball) is registered, and the result of the subtraction by the numerical value updating means, Advantageous state control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) that ends the advantageous state when the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold value, and newly starts the advantageous state when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value, In the case where the effect information registering means continuously registers the first effect information as the effect information in a plurality of times of games a specific number of times (for example, 4 times), the first effect of a specific number of times in succession. It is characterized in that the second effect information is registered as effect information subsequent to effect information.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value and continues when the second numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value before the first numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value. Here, since the subtraction of the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information is performed based on the effect information registered for each game, whether or not the advantageous state continues depends on the game result of a plurality of games. It will be different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the player's interest in continuing the advantageous state can be maintained over a plurality of games.

  Further, the effect information for subtracting the numerical value information is registered in advance not only for the current game but also for a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead. For the player, it is possible to grasp the flow of the subsequent game from the contents of the effect information registered in advance up to the game a plurality of times ahead, so that the player is interested not only in the current game but also in the subsequent game. , The interest in the advantageous state can be improved.

  At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first effect information that triggers the end of the advantageous state is continuously registered a specific number of times, the second effect that serves as an opportunity to continue the advantageous state as subsequent effect information. Register the information. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unfavorable situation for the player from continuing for a long period of time, so that the player can play the game in the advantageous state at ease.

1 ... Pachi-slot, 3L ... left reel, 3C ... middle reel, 3R ... right reel, 4 ... display window, 17L ... left stop button, 17C ... middle stop button, 17R ... right stop button, 22 ... movable decorative member (movable part) ), 41 ... Main control circuit, 42 ... Sub control circuit, 51 ... Main CPU, 81 ... Sub CPU

According to the gaming machine equipped with such AT function and ART function, the number of gaming media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform the navigation, so that the player can perform AT or ART. You will want to have a long period of time.
Therefore, in recent years, ingenuity for increasing the period of AT and ART has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Patent Document 1, when a specific combination such as watermelon or cherry is determined as an internal winning combination, the AT is determined. A gaming machine for increasing the number of games is disclosed. According to this gaming machine, since the number of AT games increases in accordance with the internal winning combination, the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination to play the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

JP, 2010-057732, A

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, since the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, the game is likely to be monotonous, and the player's expectation for continuing AT or ART is high. , I couldn't keep the player's expectation by concentrating only on one game.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of maintaining the player's interest in maintaining an advantageous state (AT, ART, etc.) over a plurality of games. The purpose is to

The gaming machine according to the present invention is an advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) for starting an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that becomes an advantageous state for the player when a predetermined condition is triggered, The numerical value updating means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) capable of updating the first numerical value information (for example, the HP of the ally character) and the second numerical value information (for example, the HP of the enemy character) in the advantageous state; As a result of the update, when the first numerical value information reaches a predetermined threshold value, the advantageous state is ended, and when the second numerical value information reaches the predetermined threshold value, the advantageous state is newly started. For example, when the subordinate control circuit 42) and the advantageous state continuation determination means newly start the advantageous state, one internal state is selected from a plurality of internal states (for example, ART state). And a determination probability of the value of the first numerical value information or the value of the second numerical value information updated by the numerical value updating means. Having a plurality of different numerical value update information (for example, the type of enemy character), one numerical value update information is determined from among the plurality of numerical value update information according to the internal state determined by the internal state determining means. A possible numerical value update information determining means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) is further provided, and the numerical value updating means determines the first numerical value information and the first numerical value information according to the one numerical value update information determined by the numerical value update information determining means. 2 Numerical information can be updated, and the plurality of internal states include at least a predetermined internal state (for example, ART state 28) in which the numerically updated information of the advantageous state with high expectation of continuation can be easily determined. When the number of times the advantageous state is newly started by the advantageous state continuation determining means exceeds a specific number (for example, 5 times), the probability that the internal state determining means will determine the predetermined internal state increases. To do.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the plurality of internal states include a specific internal state (for example, ART state 1) in which numerical update information having a low degree of expectation of continuation of the advantageous state is easily determined, and the advantageous state continues. The internal state determining means does not determine the specific internal state when the number of times that the advantageous state is newly started by the determining means exceeds a specific number of times.

According to the present invention, the player's interest in continuing the advantageous state can be maintained over a plurality of games.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine having a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played,
With multiple reels with multiple symbols displayed,
A symbol display means for displaying a part of the symbols displayed on the reel,
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player,
On the basis of the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means, a symbol changing means for changing the symbol by rotating the reel,
Based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means, the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination includes a push order combination capable of being stopped and displayed according to the order of the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined. An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of winning combinations,
Stop operation detecting means which is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detects a stop operation for stopping each reel,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the rotation of the reel is stopped so that it is displayed on the symbol display means. Reel stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol,
When the variation of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means is based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol display means. A winning determination means for determining whether or not the winning combination is won,
Lottery state start means for starting an advantageous state lottery state for performing transition lottery on whether or not to shift to the advantageous state by using a predetermined condition as a trigger,
When the internal winning combination determination means determines the internal winning combination as the internal winning combination in the advantageous state lottery state, the first transition lottery for determining the transition to the advantageous state with a predetermined probability is performed, and the advantageous state lottery is performed. Advantageous state lottery means for performing a second transition lottery for determining with a certain probability that the state is shifted to the advantageous state when a predetermined number of unit games have passed in the state,
When the first symbol combination is displayed on the activated line in the unit game in which the first transition lottery is performed, the first transition lottery is invalidated regardless of the transition lottery result to the advantageous state, and the unit concerned. When the second symbol combination is displayed on the activated line in the game, the lottery result management means for maintaining the lottery result of the first transfer lottery,
In the advantageous state lottery state, the first transition lottery is performed, and when the lottery result of the first transition lottery is maintained by the lottery result management means, or when the predetermined number of unit games have passed, Lottery state ending means for ending the advantageous state lottery state,
When it is determined to shift to the advantageous state by the first shift lottery or the second shift lottery, an advantageous state transition unit that shifts a game playing state to the advantageous state,
Equipped with
The advantageous state transition means, when the second transition lottery determines to transition to the advantageous state, the advantageous state more advantageous than when the first transition lottery determines to transition to the advantageous state. To
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images